FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 AR5BHB116 2x2 802.11n PCIe module

Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started 1 Chapter 1. Getting Started 3 5 19 22 25 Before You Start Safety Precautions Proper Posture During Computer Use Overview Turning the Computer On and O Chapter 3. Chrome OS 41 42 44 45 46 What is Google Chrome OS?

Using Browser Using the web store Cloud Print (Optional) Recovery (Optional) Chapter 2. Using the Computer Chapter 4. Appendix 28 30 33 34 35 36 37 38 Keyboard Touchpad Multi Card Slot (Optional) Connecting an External Display Device (Optional) Adjusting the Volume Network (Optional) LCD Brightness Control Battery Important Safety Information Replacement Parts and Accessories Regulatory Compliance Statements 48 50 52 65 WEEE Symbol Information 66 67 Product Speci cations Glossary Chapter 1. Getting Started Before You Start Safety Precautions Proper Posture During Computer Use Overview Turning the Computer On and O 3 5 19 22 25 Before You Start Chapter 1 Getting Started 3 Before reading the User Guide, rst check the following information. Safety Precaution Notations

Optional items, some devices and software referred to in the User Guide may not be provided and/or changed by upgrade. Note that the computer environment referred in the User Guide may not be the same as your own environment. The pictures used for the cover and the main body in the User Manual are those of the representative model of each series and may di er from the actual appearance of the product. This guide decribes procedures for using both the mouse and the touchpad. The User guide supplied with this computer may vary depending on your model. Icon Notation Description Warning Caution Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol, may cause personal injury and or fatality. Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol, may cause slight injury to yourself or damage your property. Text Notations Icon Notation Description Caution Content included in this section includes information required about the function. Note Content included in this section includes helpful information to use the function. Before You Start Chapter 1 Getting Started 4 Copyright Precautions for Operating System Support 2011 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. owns the copyright of this manual. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without the consent of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. The information in this document is subject to change without notice due to improving the performance of the product. Samsung Electronics shall not be liable for any data loss. Please take care to avoid losing any important data and backup your data to prevent any such data loss. If a problem occurs because of the reinstallation of other operating systems(OS) or a previous version of an OS pre-installed on this computer, or a software that does not support the OS, the company will not provide technical support, a replacement or refund, and if our service engineer visits you due to this problem, a service charge will be applied. Performance Restrictions Online games and some games(3D,2D) may not be supported and Full HD video and some high bit rate HD video playback may be slow and stutter on this computer. Safety Precautions Chapter 1 Getting Started 5 For your security and to prevent damage, please read the following safety instructions carefully. Since this is commonly applied to Samsung Computers, some pictures may dier from actual products. Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Installation Related Do not install the product in places exposed to humidity such as a bathrooms. There is a danger of electric shock. Use the product within the operating conditions specied in the Manufacturers User Guide. Keep the plastic bags out of the reach of children. There is a danger of suocation. Keep a distance of 15cm or more between the computer and the wall and do not place any objects between them. This may increase the internal temperature of the computer and may cause an injury. Do not install the computer on a slant or a place prone to vibrations, or avoid using the computer in that location for a long time. This increases the risk that a malfunction or damage to the product will occur. Avoid exposing any part of your body to the heat from the computer vent or AC adapter for a long time when the computer is on. Exposing a part of your body close to the heat from the vent or AC adapter for long periods of time may cause a burn. Avoid blocking the vent at the bottom or side of the computer when using it on a bed or cushion. If the vent is blocked, there is a danger of damaging the computer or overheating the inside of the computer. NB Ver 2.8 Safety Precautions Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Power Related The power plug and wall outlet gures may di er depending on the country speci cations and the product model. Do not touch the main plug or power cord with wet hands. There is a danger of electric shock. Do not exceed the standard capacity

(voltage/current) of a multiplug or power outlet extension when using it for the product. There is a danger of electric shock or re hazard. Chapter 1 Getting Started 6 If the power cord or power outlet makes a noise, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and contact a service center. There is a danger of electric shock or re hazard. Do not use a damaged or loose main plug or power cord or power outlet. There is a danger of electric shock or re hazard. Plug the power cord rmly into the power outlet and AC adapter. Failing to do so may cause re hazard. Do not unplug the power cord out by pulling the cable only. If the cord is damaged, it may cause electric shock. Do not bend the power cord excessively or do not place a heavy object over the power cord. It is especially important to keep the power cord out of reach of infants and pets. If the cord is damaged, it may cause electric shock or re. Safety Precautions Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Connect the power cord to an outlet or multiple power plug (extended cable) with a ground terminal. Failing to do so may result in electric shock. If water or a foreign substance enters the power jack, adapter or computer, immediately separate the power cord and battery and call the service center. Damage to the device within the computer may cause electric shock or re hazard. Keep the power cord or outlet clean so that they are not covered with dust. Failing to do so may result in re. Chapter 1 Getting Started 7 AC Adapter Usage Precautions Connect the power cord to the AC adapter rmly. Otherwise, there is a danger of re due to an incomplete contact. Use only the AC adapter supplied with the product. Using another adapter may cause the screen to icker. Do not place heavy objects or step onto the power cord or AC adapter to avoid damaging the power cord or AC adapter. If the cord is damaged, there is a danger of electric shock or re. Safety Precautions Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Battery Usage Related Please charge the battery fully before using the computer for the rst time. Keep the battery out of the reach of infants and pets, as they could put the battery into their mouths. There is a danger of electric shock or choking. Use an authorized battery and AC adapter only. Please use an authorized battery and adapter approved by Samsung Electronics. Unauthorized batteries and adapters may not meet the proper safety requirements and may cause problems or malfunctions and result in an explosion or re. Chapter 1 Getting Started 8 Do not use the computer in a badly ventilated location such as on bedding, on a pillow or cushion, etc, and do not use it in a location such as room with oor heating as it may cause the computer to overheat. Take care that the computer vents (on the side or the bottom) are not blocked especially in these environments. If the vents are blocked, the computer may overheat and it may cause a computer problem, or even an explosion. Do not use the computer in a humid location such as a bathroom or sauna. Please use the computer within the recommended temperature and humidity range (10~32C, 20~80% RH). Do not close the LCD panel and put the computer into your bag to move it when it is still turned on. If you put the computer into your bag without turning it o, the computer may overheat and there is a danger of re. Shut the computer down properly before moving it. Safety Precautions Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Chapter 1 Getting Started 9 Cutting the power to the internal battery

(for corresponding models only.) Never heat the product(or battery) or put the product(or battery) into a re. Do not put or use the product(or battery) in a hot location such as a sauna, inside a vehicle exposed to the heat, and so on. There is a danger of an explosion or re. Take care not to allow metal objects such as a key or clip to touch the battery terminal

(metal parts). If a metal object touches the battery terminals, it may cause excessive current ow and it may damage the battery, or result in a re. If liquid leaks out of the product(or battery) or there is a funny smell coming from the product(or battery), remove the product(or battery) the computer and contact a service center. There is a danger of an explosion or re. To use the computer safely, replace a dead battery with a new, authorized battery.

For products with built-in batteries, customers cannot remove the battery. In the case of ooding, lightning or explosions, you can cut the battery power by inserting an object such as a paper clip into the [Emergency Hole] at the bottom of the computer. Disconnect the AC adapter and insert an object such as a paper clip into the hole at the bottom of the computer to cut the battery power. In the case of ooding, lightning or explosions, cut the battery power, do not reconnect the AC adapter, and immediately contact Samsung Electronics so that the appropriate countermeasures can be taken.

Thereafter, if you connect the AC adapter, the battery power will be supplied again.

Do not cut the battery power under normal conditions. This may result in data loss or a product malfunction. Safety Precautions Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Usage Related Disconnect all cables connected to the computer before cleaning it. If your notebook is external & removable battery type, remove the external battery. There is a danger of electric shock or damage to the product. Do not connect a phone line connected to a digital phone to the modem. There is a danger of a electric shock, re or damage to the product. Do not place any container lled with water or chemicals over or near the computer. If water or chemicals enter the computer, this may cause re or electric shock. Chapter 1 Getting Started 10 If you drop or damage the computer, separate the power cord and battery and ask the service center to perform a safety check. Using a broken computer may cause electric shock or re hazard. Avoid direct sunlight when the computer is in an air-tight location such as inside a vehicle. There is a danger of a re hazard. The computer may overheat and also present opportunity to thieves. Do not use your notebook PC for long periods of time while any part of your body is making direct contact with it. The temperature of the product may increase during normal operation. This may result in harming or burning your skin. Safety Precautions Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Upgrade Related Chapter 1 Getting Started 11 Shut down the computer and disconnect all cables before disassembling the computer. If there is a modem, disconnect the phone line. If your notebook is external

& removable battery type, remove the external battery. Failing to do so, may cause electric shock. Never disassemble the power supply or AC adapter. There is a danger of electric shock. When removing the RTC (Real Time Clock) battery, keep it out of the reach of children as they could touch and/or swallow it. There is a danger of choking. If a child has swallowed it, contact a doctor immediately. Use only authorized parts (multi-

plug, battery and memory) and never disassemble parts. There is a danger of damaging the product, electric shock or re hazard. Safety Precautions Warning Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause personal injury and even fatality. Security and Movement Related Follow the instructions for the relevant location (e.g. airplane, hospital, etc.) when using a wireless communication device

(wireless LAN, Bluetooth, etc.). Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic elds. Security devices with magnetic elds include airport walk-through devices and security wands. The airport security devices that check carry-on luggage, such as conveyor belts, use x-rays instead of magnetism and will not damage a drive. Chapter 1 Getting Started 12 When carrying the notebook computer with other items, such as the adapter, mouse, books etc, take care not to press anything against the notebook computer. If a heavy object is pressed against the notebook computer, a white spot or stain may appear on the LCD. Therefore, take care not to apply any pressure to the notebook. In this case, place the notebook computer in a separate compartment away from the other objects. Safety Precautions Caution Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause slight injury or damage to the product. Installation Related Do not block the ports (holes), vents, etc. of the product and do not insert objects. Damage to a component within the computer may cause electric shock or re. When using the computer with it lying on its side, place it so that the vents face upwards. Failure to do so, may cause the internal temperature of the computer to rise and the computer to malfunction or halt. Do not place a heavy object over the product. This may cause a problem with the computer. In addition, the object may fall and cause injury, or damage the computer. Chapter 1 Getting Started 13 Battery Usage Related Dispose of worn-out batteries properly.

There is a danger of re or explosion. The battery disposal method may dier depending on your country and region. Dispose of the used battery in an appropriate way. Do not throw or disassemble the battery and do not put it into water. This may cause an injury, re or explosion. Use only a battery authorized by Samsung Electronics. Failure to do so may cause an explosion. Avoid contact with metal objects such as car keys or clips when keeping or carrying a battery. Contact with a metal may cause excessive current and a high temperature and may damage the battery or cause a re. Charge the battery according to the instructions in the manual. Failure to do so, may cause an explosion or re from damage to the product. Do not heat the product(or battery) or expose it to heat (e.g. inside a vehicle during the summer). There is a danger of explosion or re. Safety Precautions Caution Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause slight injury or damage to the product. Usage Related Do not place a candle, light cigar, etc. over or on the product. There is a danger of re. Use a wall outlet or multi-plug with a grounding part. Failure to do so may cause electric shock hazard. Make sure to have the product tested by a safety service engineer after repairing the product. Authorized Samsung Repair Centers will carry out safety checks after a repair. Using a repaired product without testing it for safety may cause an electric shock or re. In case of lightning, immediately turn the system o, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet and phone line from modem. Do not use a modem or phone. There is a danger of electric shock or re. Do not use your computer and AC-Adapter on your lap or soft surfaces. If the computer temperature increases, there is a danger of burning yourself. Chapter 1 Getting Started 14 Connect only permitted devices to the connectors or ports of the computer. Failure to do so, may cause electric shock and re. Close the LCD panel only after checking if the notebook computer is turned o. The temperature may rise and it may cause overheating and deformation of the product. Do not press the Eject Button while the Floppy Disk/CD-ROM drive is in operation. You might lose data and the disk might be suddenly ejected and could cause an injury. Take care not to drop the product while using it. This may cause personal injury or loss of data. Do not touch the antenna with electricity facility such as the power outlet. There is a danger of electric shock. When handling computer parts, follow the instructions on the manual supplied with the parts. Failure to do so, may cause damage to the product. Chapter 1 Getting Started 15 Do not place your face close to the Optical Disk Drive tray when it is operating. There is a danger of injury due to an abrupt ejection. Check CDs for cracks and damage prior to use. It may damage the disc and cause disorder of device and injury of user. Safety Precautions Caution Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause slight injury or damage to the product. If the computer emits smoke, or there is a burning smell, disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet and contact a service center immediately. If your notebook is external &

removable battery type, remove the external battery. There is a danger of re. Do not use a damaged or modied CD/Floppy Disk. There is a danger of damaging the product or personal injury. Do not insert your ngers into the PC Card Slot. There is a danger of injury or electric shock. Use recommended computer cleansing solution when cleaning the product and only use the computer when it is completely dried. Failure to do so may cause electric shock or re. Emergency disk eject method using paperclip should not be used while the disk is in motion. Make sure to use the emergency disk eject method only when the Optical Disk Drive has stopped. There is a danger of injury. Chapter 1 Getting Started 16 Security and Movement Related When moving the product, turn the power o and separate all connected cables rst. The product might be damaged or users may trip over the cables. For long periods of not using the notebook computer, discharge the battery and preserve as it is detached.

(For external & removable battery type) The battery will be preserved at its best condition. Do not operate or watch the computer while driving a vehicle. There is a danger of a trac accident. Please concentrate on driving. Safety Precautions Caution Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause slight injury or damage to the product. Upgrade Related Take care when touching the product or parts. The device may be damaged or you may be injured. Take care not to throw or drop a computer part or device. This may cause injury or damage to the product. Make sure to close the computer cover before connecting the power after a reassembly. There is a danger of electric shock if your body touches an internal part. Use parts authorized by Samsung Electronics only. Failure to do so, may cause re or damage the product. Never disassemble or repair the product by yourself. There is a danger of electric shock or re. To connect a device that is not manufactured or authorized by Samsung Electronics, enquire at your service center before connecting the device. There is a danger of damaging the product. Safety Precautions Caution Failure to follow instructions marked with this symbol may cause slight injury or damage to the product. Cautions on Preventing Data Loss

(Hard Disk Management) Take care not to damage the data on a hard disk drive.

A hard disk drive is so sensitive to external impact that an external impact may cause loss of data on the surface of the disk. Take extra care, because moving the computer or an impact on the computer when it is turned on may damage the data of the hard disk drive. The company is not liable for any loss of data on the hard disk drive. Chapter 1 Getting Started 17 Causes that may damage the data of a hard disk drive and the hard disk drive itself.

The data may be lost when an external impact is applied to the disk while disassembling or assembling the computer. The data may be lost when the computer is turned o or reset by a power failure while the hard disk drive is operating. The data may be lost and irrecoverable due to a computer virus infection. The data may be lost if the power is turned o while running a program. Sudden impact or movement to the computer while the hard disk drive is operating, may cause les to be corrupted or bad sectors on the hard disk. To prevent data loss due to damage to the hard disk drive, please backup your data frequently. Safety Precautions Chapter 1 Getting Started 18 Using the power supply in an airplane When using the auto adapter Since the power outlet type di ers depending on the type of airplane, connect the power appropriately. When using the AC power plug When the cigar socket is provided, you have to use the auto adapter (optional). Insert the cigar plug of the auto adapter into the cigar socket and connect the DC plug of the auto adapter to the power input port of the computer.

Connect the power plug pins perpendicular into the center of the power outlet.

If the plug pins are not inserted into the center of the holes, the plug pins are only inserted up to half their length. In this case, reconnect the power plug. You have to insert the power plug into the outlet when the power indicator (LED) of the power outlet is lit green. If the power is connected properly, the power indicator (LED) remains green. Otherwise, the power indicator (LED) is turned o . In this case, unplug the power, check if the power indicator (LED) is green, and then reconnect the power plug. Power Indicator

(LED) Center Holes Auto Adapter DC Plug Cigar Plug In- ight Cigar Socket When using the Airplane Charging Converter Depending on the airplane, you have to use the auto adapter and charging converter. Connect the airplane charging converter

(optional) to the auto adapter (optional) and then insert the airplane power input jack into the power outlet. Charging Converter 1 Connect this end to the auto adapter. 220V Power Plug 110V Power Plug Good Example Wrong Example Connect the airplane power input jack to the power outlet of the airplane. 2 Proper Posture During Computer Use Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 Maintaining a proper posture during computer use is very important to prevent physical harm. The following instructions are about maintaining a proper posture during computer use developed through human engineering. Please read and follow them carefully when using the computer. Otherwise, the probability of (RSI: Repetitive Strain Injury) from repeated operations may increase and serious physical harm may be caused.

The instructions in this manual have been prepared so that they can be applied within the coverage of general users. If the user is not included in the coverage, the recommendation is to be applied according to the users needs.

Do not use the computer while you are lying down, but only while you are sitting down. Do not use the computer on your lap. If the computer temperature increases, there is a danger of burning yourself. Work while keeping your waist straight. Use a chair with a comfortable back. Keep the center of your leg weight not on the chair but on your feet when you are sitting on a chair. To use the computer while talking over the telephone, use a headset. Using the computer with the phone on your shoulder is bad for posture. Keep frequently used items within a comfortable work range

(where you can reach them with your hands). Proper Posture Adjust the heights of desks and chairs appropriate to your height. The heights are to be adjusted so that your arm forms a right angle when you place your hand over the keyboard while sitting down on a chair. Adjust the height of chair so that your heel is comfortably placed on the oor. Proper Posture During Computer Use Chapter 1 Getting Started 20 Eye Position Hand Position Keep the monitor or LCD away from your eyes by at least 50cm. Keep your arm at a right angle as shown by the gure.

Adjust the height of the monitor and the LCD screen so that its top height is equal to or lower than your eyes. Avoid setting the monitor and LCD excessively bright. Keep the monitor and LCD screen clean. If you wear glasses, clean them before using the computer. When entering contents printed on a paper into the computer, use a static paper holder so that the height of the paper is almost equal to that of the monitor.

Keep the line from your elbow to your hand straight. Do not place your palm over the keyboard while typing. Do not hold the mouse with excessive force. Do not press the keyboard, touchpad or mouse with excessive force. It is recommended connecting an external keyboard and mouse when using the computer for long periods of time. Proper Posture During Computer Use Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 Volume Control (Headphones and Speakers) Use Time (Break Time) Check your volume rst to listen to music.

Take a break for 10 minutes or more after a 50-minute period when working for more than one hour. Illumination

Do not use the computer in dark locations. The illumination level for computer use must be as bright so for reading a book. Indirect illumination is recommended. Use a curtain to prevent re ection on the LCD screen. Operation Condition

Do not use the computer in hot and humid locations. Use the computer within the allowed temperature and humidity range speci ed in the User Guide. Check your volume!

Check if the volume is too loud before using headphones. It is not recommended using headphones for long periods of time. Any deviation from the equalizer default setting could cause hearing impairment. The default setting can be changed through software and driver updates without your intervention. Please check the equalizer default setting before rst usage. Overview Front View Chapter 1 Getting Started 22

The pictures used for the cover and the main body in the User Manual are those of the representative model of each series. Therefore the colors and appearance of the pictures may di er from the actual appearance of the product depending on the model. The actual color and appearance of the computer may di er from the pictures used in this guide. 1 Illumination Sensor This sensor detects the ambient illumination around the PC. When the ambient illumination decreases, the LCD backlight is automatically set to low. Conversely, if the ambient illumination increases, the LCD backlight is automatically set to high. 1 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 Camera (Optional) Using this camera, you can take still pictures and record video. 3 Microphone

(Optional) 4 LCD You can use the built-in microphone. The screen images are displayed here. 5 Power Button Turns the computer on or o . 6 Keyboard A device to enter data by pressing the keys. Touchpad/

Touchpad Buttons The touchpad and touchpad buttons provide functions similar to the mouse ball and buttons. Multi Card Slot

(Optional) A card slot that supports SD card, SDHC card, MMC card and SDXC card. 7 8 Overview Right View Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 1 Switching User Mode You can change the user mode. Left Side : User Mode Right Side : Developer Mode 2 USIM Card Slot This slot is for USIM cards. 3 3 USB Port You can connect USB devices to the USB port such as a keyboard/mouse, digital camera, etc. 1 2 Overview Left View 1 2 5 3 4 Chapter 1 Getting Started 24 1 DC Jack 2 Fan Vents 3 Monitor Port 4 USB Port A jack to connect the AC adapter that supplies power to the computer. The internal heat of the computer is emitted through these holes. If the vents are blocked the computer may overheat. Avoid blocking the vents as this may be dangerous. A port used to connect a monitor, TV or projector supporting a 15pin D-SUB interface. You can connect an external device to this port by connecting a VGA adapter. You can connect USB devices to the USB port such as a keyboard/mouse, digital camera, etc. 5 Headphone/

Microphone Jack A jack used to connect the headphones or microphone. Turning the Computer On and O Chapter 1 Getting Started 25 Turning the computer on 1 Connect the AC adapter. 2 Lift the LCD panel up. If the LCD panel is already opened, press the power button. 3 Power button LED is lit while the computer is turned on. LED Entering Sleep mode Closes the LCD panel. Adjusting the screen brightness When the computer runs on battery power, the LCD brightness is automatically set to low. Press the key to set the LCD brightness to high. Turning the Computer On and O Chapter 1 Getting Started 26 Turning the computer o Press and hold the power button for 4 seconds to shut the computer down. Chapter 2. Using the computer Keyboard Touchpad Multi Card Slot (Optional) 28 30 33 Connecting an External Display Device (Optional) 34 Adjusting the Volume Network (Optional) LCD Brightness Control Battery 35 36 37 38 Keyboard Chapter 2 Using the computer 28 Shortcut key functions and procedures are discussed in the following sections.

The keyboard image may di er from the actual keyboard. The keyboard may di er depending on your country. The following mainly describes the shortcut keys. Shortcut Keys You can use the functions described in the table below by pressing the shortcut keys. Shortcut Keys Name Function Previous page Turns back to the previous page. Next page Goes forward to the next page. Refresh Refresh the current web page. Full screen mode Displays the web page in full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, simply press the Full screen button again or click Exit full screen button, which pops up when you move a cursor to the top of a screen. Keyboard Chapter 2 Using the computer 29 Shortcut Keys Name Function Switch windows Switches between tabs. Screen Brightness Control Control the screen brightness. Mute Mutes or cancels mute. Volume control Controls the volume. Shift key Hold the Shift key down to enter upper case letters. Touchpad Chapter 2 Using the computer 30 The touchpad provides the same function as a mouse, and the touchpad button plays the role of the left mouse button. Basic Touchpad Functions

Use the Touchpad with your ngers. Using a sharp object may damage the Touchpad. The pictures in this manual may di er from the actual screenshots and the appearance of the touchpad may di er depending on the model. Moving the cursor on the screen Place your nger on the touchpad slightly and move your nger. The mouse cursor will move accordingly. Move your nger in the direction you wish to move the cursor. Touch Area Use to move the cursor. Touchpad Button You can select or run a program using this button. Touchpad Click Function Chapter 2 Using the computer 31 Right Button Function Place a nger on the touchpad and click on an item once. Alternatively, brie y press the touchpad button once. This corresponds to clicking the right mouse button. Tap the touchpad with two ngers simultaneously. Tap or Click Tap or Click Double-Click Function Drag Function Put your nger on the touchpad and quickly tap twice with your nger on an item you want. Alternatively, brie y press the touchpad button twice. Dragging refers to moving an item to another place after selecting it. To drag an item to a new location, press and hold the touchpad button over an item and drag it to the new location. TapTap or ClickClick While holding the touchpad button down Move Touchpad The Scroll Function This function is the same as the scroll area of the Touchpad. If you place two ngers over the Touchpad and move them up, down, left or right, the screen is scrolled up, down, left or right accordingly. or Chapter 2 Using the computer 32 Setting the Touchpad Sensitivity When the touchpad is too sensitive, adjust the touchpad sensitivity. To set the touchpad sensitivity Select the Sensitivity in Settings > Settings > System > Touchpad to the required level. Multi Card Slot (Optional) Chapter 2 Using the computer 33 Using the multi card slot, you can read and write data to a SD card, SDHC card, MMC card, SDXC card. You can use a card as a removable disk and conveniently exchange data with digital devices such as a digital camera, digital camcorder, MP3, etc.. Using the card 1 Insert a card into the slot according to the directions printed on the slot.

Supported Cards : SD Card, SDHC card, MMC card, SDXC card You have to additionally purchase a multi card with the necessary capacity depending on your requirements. You can use a multi card just like any data storage device. A copyright protection function is not supported. Since you can lose a card when moving the computer, keep the card separately. The gures used for the description are of a representative model. Therefore the gures may di er from the real ones. If a slot protection dummy card is inserted into your computer, remove the dummy card before using the computer. Example) SD Card Using a Mini SD and RS-MMC Since the above cards are too small, you cannot insert the cards into the slot directly. Insert the card into the dedicated adapter (available from most electronic retailers) and then insert the adapter into the multi card slot. However, depending on the adapters body material, some RS-MMC cards may not be recognized properly. Samsung recommend that you check the card is recognized correctly prior to purchasing. To remove a memory card Take hold of the end of the card and remove the card. Connecting an External Display Device (Optional) Chapter 2 Using the computer 34 If you connect an external display device such as a monitor, TV, projector, etc., you can view the picture on the wider screen of the external device when you give a presentation or watch a video or movie. Before you start, check the port and cable of the external display device and then connect the display device to the computer. About the connection cable Users should additionally purchase the necessary connection cables. Connecting to the monitor port You can experience a wider screen by connecting the computer to a monitor, TV or projector with a monitor port. You can give better presentations by connecting the computer to a projector. 1 Connect the VGA adapter to the monitor port of the computer. External Monitor TV Projector

VGA Adapter

Analog Monitor (RGB) Cable VGA Adapter 2 Connect the VGA cable (15-pin) to the connected VGA adapter and then connect the other end of the VGA cable to the VGA port of the monitor or the TV. 3 Connect the power cord of the connected monitor, TV or projector and turn the power on. Adjusting the Volume You can adjust the volume using the keyboard. Adjusting the Volume using the Keyboard Or Alternatively, press the o. key to turn the volume on or Chapter 2 Using the computer 35 Network (Optional) Chapter 2 Using the computer 36 Connecting to a Wireless LAN Connection to a Wired LAN If there is an APnearby, you can easily connect to the network. 1 Click on the network icon available APs. at the top right to view the list of To connect to a wired LAN, use the USB Ethernet adapter. For more information, refer to the Google Chrome OS Help. To connect to a wired LAN, you need to purchase USB Ethernet adapter additionally. AP List 2 Click over an AP that you want to connect to the wireless network. LCD Brightness Control You can adjust the LCD brightness in 15 levels. Controlling the Brightness Using the Keyboard Adjust the LCD brightness by pressing the key or the key. The LCD brightness can change up to 15 levels and the brightness increases by 1 level when pressing the key once. Chapter 2 Using the computer 37 LCD bad pixels principle of laptop computer

Samsung observes the speci cations regarding strict quality and reliability of LCD. But in spite of that, it is inevitable that there might be a small number of bad pixels. A large number of bad pixels can cause problems in appearance, but a small number of pixels doesnt a ect the computer performance. Therefore Samsung observes and manages the following dot principles:

- Bright dot : 2 or less

- Black dot : 4 or less

- Combination of Bright and Dark : 4 or less Instructions for Cleaning the LCD Clean the LCD panel with a soft cloth lightly moistened with computer cleansing detergent moving in one direction. Cleaning the LCD panel with excessive force can damage the LCD. Battery Chapter 2 Using the computer 38 Please refer to the following instructions when running the computer on battery power without connecting the AC power. This computer is equipped with an internal battery. Before using your computer for the rst time after purchasing it, charge the battery completely. Precautions

Users cannot remove or replace the internal battery. To remove or replace the battery, use an authorized service center in order to protect the product and users. You will be charged for this service. Use only chargers speci ed in the User Manual. Never heat the battery pack, put it near or in a re or use at a temperature higher than 60C, as this may cause re. Please refer to the system operation environment of this manual and operate and store the battery at room temperature.

Charging the Battery 1 An internal battery is embedded. Connect the AC adapter to the power input jack of the computer. The battery will start charging. 2 When charging is complete, the Charge LED turns green. Status Charging Charging complete AC adapter not connected Charge LED Red Green O The location of the internal battery Battery Chapter 2 Using the computer 39 Measuring the Remaining Battery Charge Extending the Battery Usage Time You can view the battery charge status by completing the following procedures. Decreasing the LCD Brightness Separate the AC adapter and move the mouse pointer over the battery icon at the top right to view the remaining battery charge. Press the brightness to extend the battery usage time. keys on the keyboard to decrease the LCD Battery Usage Time Information A battery is an expendable supply, so when using it over a long time, the capacity/battery life is shortened. If the battery life is reduced to under half of its initial time, we recommend purchasing a new battery. When not using the battery for a long time, store the battery after charging it to 30-40% of its capacity. This extends the battery life time. Chapter 3. Chrome OS What is Google Chrome OS?

Using Browser Using the web store Cloud Print (Optional) Recovery (Optional) 41 42 44 45 46 What is Google Chrome OS?

Chapter 3 Chrome OS 41 A Samsung Chrome computer has been optimized for the Internet and web-based applications so that you can enjoy surng the Internet easier and quicker. Using web-based applications provided by Google, you also can work on documents, presentations and spreadsheets. Usage Precautions

Some functions and screenshots are subject to change depending on the Chrome version. You can use Chrome when the computer is connected to a network. To sign-in, you need a Google account. If you do not have a Google account, you can connect with a guest account. In this case, some of the functions may not be available. Chrome includes device drivers. No additional driver installation is not required. Chrome can be updated to the latest version without the agreement of the user. For more information on how to use Chrome, refer to Settings

> Help. This computer has been designed for Chrome. If you change the operating system or install unsupported software, the company is not liable for technical support, refund or product exchange,and a Customer Service fee will be charged. Using Browser 1 8 2 9 3 4 5 7 6 Chapter 3 Chrome OS 42 Icon Menu Function Tab You can open a new page. New Tab Click to open a new Tab. Time Network Battery The current time is displayed. The current time is displayed. When the network is connected:

When the network is not connected:

Shows the remaining battery charge. Back Click to go back, hold to see history. Forward Click to go forward, hold to see history. Refresh Address line Add a Bookmark Help Center

(Optional) Report an Issue

(Optional) Settings Click to reload the current page. This shows the URL address of the current page. You can enter a website URL here to open it. Click to bookmark this page. If you bookmark a webpage, you can visit frequently visited pages quicker and easier. Click to open the Chrome OS help page. You can view detailed information on how to use the Chrome OS. Please report any feedback or suggestions for how we can improve Chrome OS for you. You can customize and control Google Chrome. 13 12 11 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Using Browser Searching the web The Google Chrome PC provides multiple search methods that enable users to search the web more quickly. Using the Search button Chapter 3 Chrome OS 43 Refreshing the screen Press the Refresh Button on the keyboard. on the keyboard, a If you press the Search button new tab opens. 1 2 Enter a keyword to search for in the address box and press 3 The search result will be displayed on the screen. Enter. For information on how to use the right-click, paste and search, and select and drag functions, refer to the Google Chrome OS Help Center. Using the web store Chapter 3 Chrome OS 44 Chrome provides the Chrome web store where users can purchase Apps, Extensions and Chrome browser themes. Using the web store

To use the Web Store, you must have the latest version of the Chrome browser installed. Some items purchased from the Web Store may not work depending on your computer speci cations. Apps : These are applications that can be executed on a browser. For example, users can install and use Apps for purposes such as writing emails, editing documents, playing music and editing photos. Extensions : These are extended functions that you can use regardless of the website.For example, you can use a post-

it or play a game while sur ng the Internet. Themes : These are images for the browser background. 1 Click the Web Store icon 2 Click on the item you want to buy in the web store. 3 Click the Install button. 4 The installation is completed.

App, the installed App appears in a If you have installed an list in a new tab. Extension, the icon of the installed If you have installed an Extension appears in the toolbar at the top of the browser. If you have installed a applied to the background of the browser. Theme, the selected theme is Cloud Print (Optional) Chapter 3 Chrome OS 45 A Google Chrome notebook computer provides the Google Cloud Print printing service. By connecting your printer to the Google Cloud, you can print to your printer from any computer. You do not need to directly connect a printer to a notebook computer or install a printer driver to print to your printer.

When you set up the service for the rst time, you need to install the printer driver on the computer that is running Windows and is connected to the printer. You can use the computer connected to the printer under Windows XP/Vista/7. For more information on supported operating systems, refer to the Chrome OS Help. Recovery (Optional) Chapter 3 Chrome OS 46 Using the Recovery function, you can restore your computer when a problem occurs with your computer. You can restore your computer after creating an update image and using a USB ash drive. For more information, refer to the Chrome OS Help. Chapter 4. Appendix Important Safety Information Replacement Parts and Accessories Regulatory Compliance Statements WEEE Symbol Information Product Speci cations Glossary 48 50 52 65 66 67 Important Safety Information Chapter 4 Appendix 48 Safety Instructions Your system is designed and tested to meet the latest standards for safety of information technology equipment. However, to ensure safe use of this product, it is important that the safety instructions marked on the product and in the documentation are followed. Always follow these instructions to help guard against personal injury and damage to your system. Setting Up your System

Read and follow all instructions marked on the product and in the documentation before you operate your system. Retain all safety and operating instructions for future use. Do not use this product near water or a heat source such as a radiator. Set up the system on a stable work surface. The product should be operated only with the type of power source indicated on the rating label. Ensure that the electrical outlet you are using to power your equipment is easily accessible in case of re or short circuit.

If your computer has a voltage selector switch, make sure that the switch is in the proper position for your area. Openings in the computer case are provided for ventilation. Do not block or cover these openings. Make sure you provide adequate space, at least 6 inches (15 cm), around the system for ventilation when you set up your work area. Never insert objects of any kind into the computer ventilation openings. Ensure that the fan vents on the bottom of the casing are clear at all times. Do not place the computer on a soft surface, doing so will block the bottom vents. If you use an extension cord with this system, make sure that the total power rating on the products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord power rating. For Notebooks with glossy display bezels the user should consider the placement of the Notebook as the bezel may cause disturbing reections from surrounding light and bright surfaces. Important Safety Information Chapter 4 Appendix 49 Care During Use The Instruction On Safety Operation of NotePC 1. When installing and operating devices please refer to safety requirements in the user guide. 2. Devices can be used only with the equipment specied in the 3. technical specications of the devices. If any smell of burning or smoke is detected from the computer the unit should be switched o and battery removed. The unit should be checked by a qualied technician before reuse. 4. Service and repair of devices should be carried out by authorized service centers. 5. Do not allow your portable computer to operate with the base resting directly on exposed skin for extended periods of time. The surface temperature of the base will rise during normal operation (particularly when AC Power is present). Allowing sustained contact with exposed skin can cause discomfort or eventually a burn.

Do not walk on the power cord or allow anything to rest on it. Do not spill anything on the system. The best way to avoid spills is to not eat or drink near your system. Some products have a replaceable CMOS battery on the system board. There is a danger of explosion if the CMOS battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace the battery with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. If the CMOS battery requires replacement insure that a qualied technician performs the task. When the computer is turned o, a small amount of electrical current still ows through the computer. To avoid electrical shock, always unplug all power cables, remove the battery and modem cables from the wall outlets before cleaning the system. Unplug the system from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualied personnel if:

The power cord or plug is damaged. Liquid has been spilled into the system. The system does not operate properly when the operating instructions are followed. The system was dropped or the casing is damaged. The system performance changes. Replacement Parts and Accessories Chapter 4 Appendix 50 Use only replacement parts and accessories recommended by manufacturer. Laser Safety To reduce the risk of re, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunications line cord. Do not use this product in areas classi ed as hazardous. Such areas include patient care areas of medical and dental facilities, oxygen rich environments, or industrial areas. All systems equipped with CD or DVD drives comply with the appropriate safety standards, including IEC 60825-1. The laser devices in these components are classi ed as Class 1 Laser Products under a US Department of Health and Human Services

(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard. Should the unit ever need servicing, contact an authorized service location. Battery Disposal Do not put rechargeable batteries or products powered by non-removable rechargeable batteries in the garbage. Contact the Samsung Helpline for information on how to dispose of batteries that you cannot use or recharge any longer. Follow all local regulations when disposing of old batteries. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Laser Safety Note:

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those speci ed in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To prevent exposure to laser beams, do not try to open the enclosure of a CD or DVD drive. Class 1M laser radiation when operating part is open.

Do not view directly with optical instruments. Class 3B invisible laser radiation when open.

Avoid exposure to the beam. Replacement Parts and Accessories Chapter 4 Appendix 51 Connecting and Disconnecting the AC adapter General Requirements The socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible. Do not unplug the power cord by only pulling the cable. Power Cord Requirements The power cord set (wall plug, cable and AC adapter plug) you received with your computer meets the requirements for use in the country where you purchased your equipment. Power cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where you use the computer. For more information on power cord set requirements, contact your authorized dealer, reseller, or service provider. The requirements listed below are applicable to all countries:

All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country where the power cord set will be used. The power cord set must have a minimum current capacity of 7 A and a nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 volts AC, as required by each countrys power system. (USA ONLY) The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C7 (or C5) connector, for mating with appliance inlet on the computer. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 52 Wireless Guidance

(If tted with 2.4G band or 5G band) Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specic countries are listed in the specic country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualied for use in the countries identied by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, please contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. The RF eld strength of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your notebook are well below all international RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your notebook) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed on the next page:

Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned o while traveling in an airplane. 802.11ABGN (also known as wireless Ethernet or Wi) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or ammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. Every country has dierent restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 53

Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modication to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Please contact manufacturer for service. Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information. United States of America USA and Canada Safety Requirements and Notices Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; if not, the radio may be damaged. Use in specic environments:

The use of wireless devices in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless devices on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless devices in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Do not operate a portable transmitter (such as a wireless network device) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the device has been modied to be qualied for such use. Use On Aircraft Caution Regulations of the FCC and FAA prohibit airborne operation of radio-frequency wireless devices because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: Refer to the documentation supplied with wireless Ethernet adapters or other devices in the wireless network. The Part 15 radio device operates on a non-interference basis with other devices operating at this frequency. Any changes or modication to said product not expressly approved by Intel could void the users authority to operate this device. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 54 Unintentional Emitter per FCC Part 15 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dierent from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

If necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may nd the following booklet helpful: Something About Interference. This is available at FCC local regional oces. Our company is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specied by our company. The correction will be the responsibility of the user. Use only shielded data cables with this system. Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15

(If tted with 2.4G band or 5G band) Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualied for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. This transmitter must not be collocated or operate in conjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 55 This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and /or damage this device. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modication to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. FCC Part 68 (If tted with a modem device.) This equipment compiles with part of the FCC rules. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company. This equipment uses the following USOC jacks : RJ11C An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or promises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant. See Installation Instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed ve (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by total RENs, contact the local telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area. If the terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the Telephone Company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to le a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 56 The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could aect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advanced notice in order for you to make necessary modications to maintain uninterrupted service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment (Modem) for repair or warranty information, please contact your local distributor. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. The user must use the accessories and cables supplied by the manufacturer to get optimum performance from the product. No repairs may be done by the customer. This equipment cannot be used on public coin phone service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party line service is subject to state taris. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the rst page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identication of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be any number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.) In order to program this information into your fax machine, refer to your communications software user manual. Canada Unintentional Emitter per ICES-003 This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. Le prsent appareil numrique nmet pas de bruits radiolectriques dpassant les limitesapplicables aux appareils numriques de Classe B prescrites dans le rglement sur le brouillage radiolectrique dict par Industrie Canada. Intentional Emitter per RSS 210 This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two onditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. L utilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 57 Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modication to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.

(If tted with 2.4G band or 5G band) Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualied for use in Canada if an Industry Canada ID number is on the system label. When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25- to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85 GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your notebook, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by Industry Canada. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 58 To avoid electrical shock or equipment malfunction do not attempt to make electrical ground connections by yourself. Contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5. Telecommunications per DOC notice

(for products tted with an IC-compliant modem) The Industry Canada label identies certied equipment. This certication means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operation, and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should make sure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the inside wiring associated with a single-line individual service may be extended by means of a certied connector assembly. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certied equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should make sure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 59 Brazil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. European Union European Directives This Information Technology Equipment has been tested and found to comply with the following European directives:

EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC European Union CE Marking and Compliance Notices Manufacturer Information Products intended for sale within the European Union are marked with the Conformit Europene (CE) Marking, which indicates compliance with the applicable Directives and European standards and amendments identied below. This equipment also carries the Class 2 identier. The following information is only applicable to systems labeled with the CE mark

. Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. 416, Maetan-3Dong, Yeongtong-Gu, Suwon-City, Gyeonggi-Do, 443-742, Korea Samsung Electronics Suzhou Computer Co., Ltd. No. 198, Fangzhou Road, Suzhou Industrial Park, Jiangsu Province, 215021, China Tel: +86-512-6253-8988 For the web or the phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the Warranty or contact the retailer where you purchased your product. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 60 European Radio Approval Information

(for products tted with EU-approved radio devices) This Product is a Notebook computer; low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4GHz/5GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your notebook system which is intended for home or o ce use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only quali ed for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Noti ed Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you notebook is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. See 802.11b and 802.11g restrictions for speci c countries or regions within countries under the heading European Economic Area Restrictions below. EU R&TTE Compliance Statements esky

[Czech]

Dansk

[Danish]

Deutsch

[German]

Eesti

[Estonian]

English Espaol

[Spanish]

Samsung tmto prohlauje, e tento Notebook PC je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/ES. Undertegnede Samsung erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr Notebook PC overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt Samsung, dass sich das Gert Notebook PC in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG be ndet. Kesolevaga kinnitab Samsung seadme Notebook PC vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/

E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, Samsung, declares that this Notebook PC is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente Samsung declara que el Notebook PC cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 61

[Greek]

Franais

[French]

Italiano

[Italian]

Latviski

[Latvian]

Samsung Notebook PC 1999/5/. Par la prsente Samsung dclare que lappareil Notebook PC est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Con la presente Samsung dichiara che questo Notebook PC conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o Samsung deklar, ka Notebook PC atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. Lietuvi

[Lithuanian]

iuo Samsung deklaruoja, kad is Notebook PC atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/

EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Nederlands

[Dutch]

Hierbij verklaart Samsung dat het toestel Notebook PC in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG. Malti

[Maltese]

Hawnhekk, Samsung, jiddikjara li dan Notebook PC jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm d-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. Magyar

[Hungarian]

Alulrott, Samsung nyilatkozom, hogy a Notebook PC megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EC irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Polski

[Polish]

Niniejszym Samsung owiadcza, e Notebook PC jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. Portugus

[Portuguese]

Samsung declara que este Notebook PC est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/CE. Slovensko

[Slovenian]

Samsung izjavlja, da je ta Notebook PC v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/ES. Slovensky

[Slovak]

Samsung tmto vyhlasuje, e Notebook PC spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES. Suomi

[Finnish]

Svenska

[Swedish]

Samsung vakuuttaa tten ett Notebook PC tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/

EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar Samsung att denna Notebook PC str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/

EG. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 62 slenska

[Icelandic]

Hr me lsir Samsung y r v a Notebook PC er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og arar krfur, sem gerar eru tilskipun 1999/5/EC. Norsk

[Norwegian]

Samsung erklrer herved at utstyret Notebook PC er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Trkiye

[Trke]

Bu belge ile, Samsung bu Notebook PCnin 1999/5/EC Ynetmeliinin temel gerekliliklerine ve ilgili hkmlerine uygun olduunu beyan eder. To view the EU Declaration of Conformity for this product (in English only), go to: http://www.samsung.com/uk/support/

download/supportDownMain.do then search the model number of the product. If the Declaration of Conformity for the model you are interested in is not available on our web-site, please contact your distributor. European Economic Area Restrictions Local Restriction of 802.11b/802.11g Radio Usage

[Note to integrator: The following statements on local restrictions must be published in all end-user documentation provided with the system or product incorporating the wireless product.]

Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11b/802.11g wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11b/802.11g products are designed for use only in speci c countries or regions, and are not allowed to be operated in countries or regions other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries or regions for which they were intended and for verifying that they are con gured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country or region of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country or region of use could be an infringement of local law and may be punished as such. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 63 The European variant is intended for use throughout the European Economic Area. However, authorization for use is further restricted in particular countries or regions within countries, as follows:

For Guadeloupe, Martinique, St Pierre et Miquelon, Mayotte:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor and outdoor use. For Reunion, Guyane:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use. 2.420 - 2.4835 GHz for outdoor use (channels 5 to 13) The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. General European standards dictate maximum radiated transmit power of 100 mW eective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) and the frequency range 2400 2483.5 MHz. The low band 5.15 - 5.35 GHz is for indoor use only. Belgium The product may be used outdoors, but for outdoor transmissions over a distance of 300m or more, a license from the BIPT is required. This restriction should be indicated in the manual as follows:

Dans le cas dune utilisation prive, lextrieur dun btiment, au-

dessus dun espace public, aucun enregistrement nest ncessaire pour une distance de moins de 300m. Pour une distance suprieure 300m un enregistrement auprs de lIBPT est requise. Pour une utilisation publique lextrieur de btiments, une licence de lIBPT est requise. Pour les enregistrements et licences, veuillez contacter lIBPT. France For Metropolitan departments:

2.400 - 2.4835 GHz for indoor use. 2.400 - 2.454 GHz (channels 1 to 7) for outdoor use. Regulatory Compliance Statements Chapter 4 Appendix 64 This equipment has been approved to Council Decision 98/482/

EEC - CTR 21 for Pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). However, due to dierences between the individual PSTNs provided in dierent countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. In the event of problems, you should contact manufacturer Technical Support. European Telecommunication Information

(for products tted with EU-approved modems) indicates compliance of this equipment Marking by the symbol to the Radio and Telecom Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/

EC. Such marking is indicative that this equipment meets or exceeds the following technical standards:

CTR 21 - Attachment requirements for pan-European approval for connection to the analogue Public Switched Telephone Networks

(PSTNs) of TE (excluding TE supporting voice telephony services) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signaling. Although this equipment can use either loop disconnect

(pulse) or DTMF (tone) signaling, only the performance of the DTMF signaling is subject to regulatory requirements for correct operation. It is therefore strongly recommended that the equipment is set to use DTMF signaling for access to public or private emergency services. DTMF signaling also provides faster call setup. WEEE Symbol Information Chapter 4 Appendix 65 Correct disposal of this product

(Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government oce, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Correct disposal of batteries in this product Pb

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material re-use, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. USA ONLY This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Maganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA. Perchlorate Material- special handling may apply, See www.dtsc. ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To nd the nearest recycling location, go to our website:www. samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or call, (877) 278-0799 Product Specications Chapter 4 Appendix 66 The system specications may dier depending on the derived models. For detailed system specications, refer to the product catalogue. CPU Intel ATOM Processor Main Memory Memory type: DDR3 SDRAM on board Main Chipset Intel NM10 HDD Graphics SSD Intel GMA 3150 (Internal) Operating Environment Temperature: -5~40C for storage, 10~32C when operating Humidity: 5~90% for storage, 20~80% when operating Operating Voltage 100-240VAC Frequency 50/60Hz Output Power 40W Output Voltage 19VDC 2.1A(40W)

Optional components may not be provided or dierent components may be provided depending on the computer model. The system specications are subject to change without notice. The amount of memory that Windows can use may be smaller than the actual amount of memory available. For this product, you cannot install an additional or replace the existing memory module. ENERGY STAR Partner As an ENERGY STAR Partner, SAMSUNG has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy eciency. Glossary Chapter 4 Appendix 67 The Glossary lists the terminologies used in this User Guide. For terminologies other than these, look in Windows Help. Backup A way to save the current data to restore it later if necessary. A backup is a way to restore computer data when the data or computer is damaged. DDR SDRAM

(Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) DRAM is a memory type whose cells consist of a capacitor and transistor manufactured at a low price. SDRAM is a memory type whose performance has been improved by synchronizing the clock with the external CPU clock. DDR SDRAM is a memory type whose performance has been improved by doubling the operating speed of the SDRAM and is widely used nowadays. This computer uses DDR SDRAM. DHCP (Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol) This refers to automatically allocating IP addresses to the users on the network by the network administrators. D-sub (D-subminiature) This is the cable connecting a general CRT monitor and the computer. Analog video is output through this cable. Firewall A security system used to protect an internal network or intranet from external networks through an authentication procedure. LAN (Local Area Network) A communications network connecting computers, printers and other devices within a local area such as within a building. A LAN enables all connected devices to interact with other devices on the network. The current LAN uses the Ethernet media access control method developed in the early 1980s. To connect to an Ethernet, a network card called a LAN card, Ethernet card or network interface card is required. To exchange data between computers, a protocol is required besides the hardware equipment. Windows Vista uses TCP/IP as the default protocol. LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) There are Passive Matrix and Active Matrix LCD types. This computer uses the Active Matrix type LCD called a TFT LCD. Since an LCD is implemented by transistors instead of a cathode-ray tube unlike a CRT, its size can be slim. And because it does not blink, it reduces eye strain. MMC (MultiMedia Card) card This is an external-type ash memory used for mobile devices such as mobile phones or digital cameras. Glossary Chapter 4 Appendix 68 Network A group of computers and devices, such as printers and scanners, connected by a communications link. A network can be either small or large and can be connected permanently through cables or temporarily through telephone lines or wireless links. The biggest network is the Internet, a worldwide network. PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) card This is an extended card slot specication for mobile computers such as a notebook computer. Not only a memory, device but also most peripherals such as hard disk drives, LAN cards, etc. can be connected to this card slot. Protocol A protocol is a set of rules used by computers to communicate with each other across a network. A protocol is a convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between computing endpoints. It denes the data transmission procedures and the transmission medium for more ecient network functions. SD (Secure Digital) card An SD card is a ash (non-volatile) memory card developed for mobile devices by improving on the MMC card. Although an MMC card can be used in an SD card slot, an SD card is not recognized when inserted into an MMC card. SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) card This is the extension of the SD card that supports over 2GB bytes. Sleep Mode A power mode that enables computers to save power consumption when they are not being used. When a computer is in Sleep Mode, the data on the computer memory is not saved to the hard disk. If the power is turned o, the data in memory will be lost. TCP/IPv4 This is a 4 byte (32 bit) address system separated into each byte

(8 bits) by a dot and each byte is represented as a decimal number. USB (Universal Serial Bus) This refers to a serial interface standard developed to replace the conventional interface standards such as Serial and PS/2. While USB 1.1 supports 12Mbps (12 million bits per second), USB 2.0 supports a data rate that is 40 times (480Mpbs) faster than that of USB 1.1. The data rate of USB 2.0 is equivalent to that of IEEE1394. Therefore USB 2.0 is used for A/V devices supported by IEEE 1394 and a 2nd HDD and CDRW that require a high data rate.

Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC Guide dutilisation Dcouvrez comment utiliser votre ordinateur portable Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC 1 -

Copyright and Trademark Information Fujitsu America, Inc. has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document; however, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LIFEBOOK are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited. Intel, Intel Core, and Centrino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Atheros is a registered trademark of Atheros Communications, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., USA. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. PowerDirector, PowerDVD, MakeDisc, and YouCam are trademarks of CyberLink Corp. Adobe and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Norton and Norton Internet Security are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other countries. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Boost is a trademark of DTS (BVI) Limited (in Hong Kong and China) and DTS, Inc. (outside of Hong Kong and China). DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2012 Fujitsu America, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent of Fujitsu. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the written consent of Fujitsu. B6FJ-8321-01ENZ0-00 1 WARNING: HANDLING THE CORD ON THIS PRODUCT WILL EXPOSE YOU TO LEAD, A CHEMICAL KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. USER GUIDE FOR WIRELESS BROADBAND CONNECTION IF YOU HAVE THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS WAN (WWAN) DEVICE INSTALLED IN YOUR NOTEBOOK, THE WWAN USERS GUIDE IS LOCATED AT:

HTTP://SOLUTIONS.US.FUJITSU.COM/WWW/CONTENT/SUPPORT/MOBILE/SUPPORT_NOTICES PLEASE CLICK 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION TO OPEN THE FULL USER GUIDE CONTAINING WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH RF SAFETY WHEN USING THE WWAN DEVICE. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Declares that product:

Fujitsu America, Inc. 1250 E. Arques Avenue Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746-6000 Base Model Configuration: LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. 2 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed I.T.E. Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 4.22 A (80 W). AC adapter output polarity:

When using your notebook equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

The bottom of this notebook computer can become hot when used for long periods of time. When using this notebook, take caution to limit long term or continuous use while resting it on exposed skin, such as the lap. Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions on the next page. For Authorized Repair Technicians Only SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF LITHIUM (CLOCK) BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING FUSE. 3 Recycling your battery Over time, the batteries that run your mobile computer will begin to hold a charge for a shorter amount of time; this is a natural occurrence for all batteries. When this occurs, you may want to replace the battery with a fresh one*. If you replace it, it is important that you dispose of the old battery properly because batteries contain materials that could cause environmental damage if disposed of improperly. Fujitsu is very concerned with environmental protection, and has enlisted the services of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation

(RBRC)**, a non-profit public service organization dedicated to protecting our environment by recycling old batteries at no cost to you. RBRC has drop-off points at tens of thousands of locations throughout the United States and Canada. To find the location nearest you, go to www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-822-8837. If there are no convenient RBRC locations near you, you can also go to the EIA Consumer Education Initiative website (http://EIAE.org/) and search for a convenient disposal location. Remember protecting the environment is a cooperative effort, and you should make every effort to protect it for current and future generations.

* To order a new battery for your Fujitsu mobile computer, go to the Fujitsu shopping site at www.shopfujitsu.com in the US or www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks in Canada.

** RBRC is an independent third party to which Fujitsu provides funding for battery recycling; RBRC is in no way affiliated with Fujitsu. 4 Contents Chapter 1 About This Guide . 8 Conventions Used in the Guide. 8 Fujitsu Contact Information . 9 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview . 11 Locating the Controls and Connectors . 12 Top Components . 15 Left-Side Panel Components. 17 Right-Side Panel Components . 19 Back Panel Components . 21 Bottom Components . 22 Status Indicator Panel . 24 Power Indicator . 24 Battery Charging Indicators . 25 Battery Level Indicator . 25 Display Panel . 27 Opening the Display Panel . 27 Using the System as a Tablet . 28 Changing Auto Rotation Feature . 29 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness . 30 Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor . 31 1 Keyboard. 32 Using the Keyboard. 32 Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen. 35 Using the Touchpad . 35 Active Digitizer Display . 38 Using the Capacitive Touchscreen . 42 General Gesture Mode: One- and Two-Finger Gestures. 42 Installing a Pen Tether . 44 Volume Control. 45 Controlling the Volume. 45 Modular Bay Devices . 46 Removing and Installing Modular Devices . 46 LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons. 48 Security Button Functions. 48 Post-logon button functions. 50 Changing Tablet PC Button Functions . 51 Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel. 52 Passwords . 52 Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel . 54 Precautions . 54 Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application . 55 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources . 57 Connecting the Power Adapters . 57 Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 59 Power On . 59 Boot Sequence . 60 Hard Disk Drive Passwords . 61 BIOS Setup Utility . 61 2 -

Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Booting the System. 62 Starting Windows the First Time. 62 Power Management . 64 Power/Suspend/Resume Slide . 64 Sleep Mode . 64 Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature. 65 Windows Power Management . 65 Restarting the System. 66 Powering Off . 66 ENERGY STAR Compliance. 67 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery . 68 Recharging the Batteries . 69 Replacing the Battery . 71 Secure Digital Cards. 73 Installing SD Cards . 74 Removing an SD Card . 74 Memory Upgrade Module . 75 Installing Memory Upgrade Modules. 75 Removing a Memory Upgrade Module . 77 Checking the Memory Capacity . 77 Device Ports . 79 Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack . 79 Port Replicator Connector . 79 Universal Serial Bus Ports . 80 Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. 81 Headphone Jack . 81 Microphone Jack . 81 HDMI Port.. 82 External Video Port . 82 3 -

Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Port Replicator . 83 Port Replicator Components. 84 Attaching the Port Replicator . 86 Detaching Port Replicator. 86 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting. 87 Identifying the Problem . 87 Specific Problems . 89 Power On Self Test Messages . 98 Restoring Your System Image and Software. 99 Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images . 99 Backing Up a System Image . 101 Recovery and Utility tabs . 105 Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility . 106 Downloading Driver Updates . 107 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 108 Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 109 Cleaning the dust filter . 111 Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 112 Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 112 Batteries . 113 Media Care . 114 4 -

Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications . 116 Microprocessor . 116 Chipset. 116 Memory . 116 Video . 117 Digitizer. 117 Audio . 117 Mass Storage Device Options . 117 Modular Bay Devices. 118 Features. 118 Device Ports. 119 Keyboard . 120 Power. 120 Dimensions and Weight . 121 Environmental Requirements. 121 Popular Accessories. 121 Pre-Installed Software . 122 Learning About Your Software . 122 Glossary/Regulatory Glossary. 125 Regulatory Information . 138 5 -

Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN. 142 Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document . 142 Characteristics of the WLAN Device . 142 Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device. 143 Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device. 145 Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch . 146 Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar. 146 Activating the WLAN Device . 146 Configuring the Wireless LAN. 147 Configuring the WLAN . 147 Connection to the network . 147 Troubleshooting the WLAN. 148 Troubleshooting . 148 WLAN Specifications . 150 Specifications . 150 Using the Bluetooth Device . 151 What is Bluetooth . 151 Where to Find Information About Bluetooth . 151 Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . 153 Getting Started . 154 Installing OmniPass . 154 User Enrollment . 156 Using OmniPass . 159 Configuring OmniPass . 164 OmniPass Control Center . 166 Troubleshooting . 166 6 -

Appendix C: Using Intel Wireless Display Using the Wireless Display technology . 168 Starting the WiDi application . 169 Index . 170 7 -

Preface About This Guide The LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC from Fujitsu America is a powerful convertible computer. It can be used either as a standard notebook using keyboard input, or in tablet configuration using pen input. It is powered by the new 3rd Generation Intel Core Processor, has a built-in color display with a dual digitizer, and brings the computing power of desktop personal computers (PCs) to a portable and versatile environment. This manual explains how to operate your LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PCs hardware and pre-installed system software. Conventions Used in the Guide Keyboard and on-screen keys appear in brackets. Example: [Fn], [F1], [ESC], [ENTER] and [CTRL]. Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. For example: (See Installation Procedure on page 43.) Note that all cross-references are linked to the referenced items, so by clicking the link, you will automatically go to the referenced item or page. On-screen menu items appear in bold. Example: Click Fujitsu Menu, and select your choice. THE INFORMATION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT WILL ENHANCE YOUR UNDERSTANDING OF THE SUBJECT MATERIAL. 8 THE CAUTION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT IS IMPORTANT TO THE SAFE OPERATION OF YOUR COMPUTER, OR TO THE INTEGRITY OF YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL CAUTION INFORMATION CAREFULLY. THE WARNING ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO EITHER YOU, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL WARNING INFORMATION CAREFULLY. Fujitsu Contact Information Service and Support Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:

Toll free: 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Website:

U.S.A. - us.fujitsu.com/solutions Canada - www.fujitsu.ca Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any 9 - About This Guide Fujitsu Shopping Online You can go directly to the online by going to the website at: www.shopfujitsu.com. Maintaining Latest Configuration To ensure that you always have the most current driver updates related to your system, you should occasionally access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility is available to allow you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. If you have a Windows 7 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site (http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). Limited Warranty Your LIFEBOOK notebook is backed by a Fujitsu International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your notebook for the Limited Warranty period and terms and conditions. 10 - About This Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview This section describes the components of your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC. We strongly recommend that you read it before using your Tablet PC even if you are already familiar with notebook computers. Figure 1. Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC 11 Locating the Controls and Connectors Connectors and peripheral interfaces on the LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC and the optional port replicator allow you to connect a variety of devices. Specific locations are illustrated in Figures 2 through 6. The table below provides a short description of each icon on the LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC and/or optional port replicator. Each of the icons is either molded into or printed on the Tablet PC or port replicator chassis. Connection Tablet PC Icon Purpose SD/SDHC slot Smart Card Slot USB Port USB Port with Anytime USB Charge Microphone Jack Headphone Jack HDMI Port The Secure Digital (SD)/SHDC card slot allows you to insert a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. A dedicated Smart Card slot allows you to insert a Smart Card on which you can store such data as medical information or electronic cash. Connect Universal Serial Bus devices to the Tablet PC. Note that USB ports with a black tab in the center are for 2.0 or 1.1 compliant USB devices; those with a blue tab are for USB 3.0 devices.

Connect Universal Serial Bus 2.0 or 1.1 compliant USB devices. This port can also be used to charge USB devices whether the system is powered on or not. Connect an external microphone. The internal microphone is disabled when you plug in an external microphone. Connect stereo headphones or powered external speakers. The internal speaker is disabled when you plug in external headphones or powered speakers. The HDMI port allows you to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-definition television or AV receiver). Security lock slot The security slot allows you to secure the Tablet PC using compatible locking devices. 12 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Connection Tablet PC Icon Purpose Suspend/

Resume slide Local Area Network

(LAN) Wireless Device On-

Off Switch External Video port Digital Video Interface DisplayPort The Suspend/Resume slide allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your Tablet PC from suspend mode, and power on the system when it has been shut down from Windows. The LAN (RJ-45) jack is used to connect the internal 10/100/1000* Base-T/Tx Ethernet to a Local Area Network (LAN) in your office or home, or broadband devices such as a cable modem, DSL, or satellite Internet.

*1000 Mbps, commonly referred to as Gigabit Ethernet. The Wireless Device switch allows you to turn power to the optional wireless devices on and off. The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector to your computer. The DVI-D port on the optional port replicator allows you to connect a flat-panel LCD monitor or television that is equipped with a DVI-D port for ultra-crisp digital images and graphics. The DisplayPort on the optional port replicator lets you to connect DisplayPort-compatible digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DisplayPort cable. 13 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Optional Web Cam Web Cam Access LED Display Panel Windows Button LIFEBOOK Security/

Tablet PC Buttons Power/Suspend/

Resume Slide Built-in Microphone Ambient Light Sensor Keyboard Status Indicator Panel Built-in Microphone Fingerprint Sensor Stereo Speaker Status Indicator Panel Wireless Device On/Off Switch SD/SDHC Card Slot Stereo Speaker Touchpad Cursor Control Figure 2. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with display open 14 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Top Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs top components. Web Camera The optional FHD (1920 x 1080 pixel) digital web camera can be used to take pictures of yourself to send over the internet. Web Cam Access LED The web cam access LED indicates when the web camera is activated. Display Panel The display panel is a color LED panel with backlighting for the display of text and graphics. The display has an active digitizer that is used with a stylus, and a dual digitizer that can be used with either a stylus or your fingers. Windows Button After you log on, the Windows button can be used to perform two functions. When pressed alone, it opens up the Start menu. When pressed at the same time as the power button, it acts the same as if pressing [Ctl] + [Alt] + [Del]. LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons The LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons provide password security for your system, as well as one-touch application launch capability. See LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons on page 48. Power/Suspend/Resume Slide The Power/Suspend/Resume slide allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from sleep mode, and power on your Tablet PC when it has been shut down from Windows. See Power/Suspend/Resume Slide on page 64. Dual Built-in Microphones The built-in microphones allows you to record voice and annotations. Keyboard A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows keys. See Keyboard on page 32. 15 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Dual Stereo Speakers The built-in dual speakers provide stereo sound. Touchpad Cursor Control The touchpad cursor control offers an additional method for moving the cursor. See Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen on page 35. SD/SDHC Card Slot The SD/SDHC card slot allows you to install a Secure Digital (SD) card for data storage. This architecture allows you to transfer data from a variety of different digital devices. See Installing SD Cards on page 74. Wireless Device On/Off Switch The wireless device on/off switch is used to turn on and off the optional wireless devices. Switching it off when not in use will help to extend battery life. See Activating the WLAN Device on page 146. Status Indicator Panels The Status Indicator Panels display symbols that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. Status indicators are located in two locations: on the front edge of the system (system status indicators) and below the application buttons (button status indicators). See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Fingerprint Sensor The fingerprint sensor device allows you to log onto your system and password-protected websites and applications by swiping your finger over the sensor. See Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 153. Ambient Light Sensor The ambient light sensor measures the light in which the computer is operating and automatically adjusts the brightness of the display to suit the lighting conditions. See Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor on page 31. 16 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Air Vents HDMI Port Smart Card Slot DC Power Jack External Video Port USB 3.0 Port with Anytime USB Charge Headphone Jack Microphone Jack Figure 3. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC left-side panel USB 3.0 Port Left-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs left-side components. Air Vents The air vents are used to cool the system to prevent overheating. TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. HDMI Port The HDMI port is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-definition television or AV receiver). See HDMI Port. on page 82. 17 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Smart Card Slot A dedicated Smart Card slot is provided on your Tablet PC. Smart Cards are the same size and shape as a credit card, but they contain embedded integrated circuits. To use the embedded Smart Card Reader, you must purchase optional third-party software for installation. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones. See Headphone Jack on page 81. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external stereo microphone. See Microphone Jack on page 81. USB 3.0 Port with Anytime USB Charge The USB 3.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 3.0 transfers data at up to 5Gbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0 devices, which transfer data at up to 12 Mbps and 480 Mbps, respectively. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. Note that this USB 3.0 port has Anytime USB Charge capability, which allows you to charge a USB device whether or not the system is powered on. USB 3.0 Port The USB 3.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 3.0 transfers data at up to 5Gbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0 devices, which transfer data at up to 12 Mbps and 480 Mbps, respectively. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. External Video Port The external monitor port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. See External Video Port on page 82. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. 18 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Modular Bay Device USB 2.0 Port Pen Tether Attachment Point Modular Bay Eject Lever Figure 4. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC right-side panel Anti-theft Lock Slot Pen Garage Right-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs right-side components. Modular Bay The Modular Bay can accommodate one of the following devices. See Modular Bay Devices on page 46. Modular Blu-ray RW Drive. Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer Modular Lithium ion battery Weight Saver USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480 Mbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 1 2Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. Pen Tether Attachment Point The pen tether attachment point is designed to securely hold a pen tether to prevent loss of the pen. See Installing a Pen Tether on page 44 for additional information. 19 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Pen Garage The pen garage is used to store the pen (also called a stylus) when not in use.The pen is used as the interface with the active digitizer display. Anti-theft Lock Slot The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. Modular Bay Eject Lever The Modular Bay Eject Lever allows you to release the modular bay device so that it can be removed. See Modular Bay Devices on page 46. 20 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack Figure 5. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC back panel USB 2.0 Port Back Panel Components Following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs back panel components. Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for an internal Gigabit (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. See Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack on page 79. USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480 Mbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 1 2Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. 21 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Cleanable Dust Filter Air Vents

(multiple locations) Memory Upgrade Compartment Wireless WAN Module ompartment Battery Latch Battery Latch Port Replicator Connector Lithium ion Battery Figure 6. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC bottom panel Bottom Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs bottom panel components. Memory Upgrade Compartment Your Tablet PC comes with high speed Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3 1600 MHz SDRAM). The memory upgrade compartment allows you to expand the system memory capacity of your Tablet PC, thus improving overall performance. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 75. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary to open this compartment. 22 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Air Vents The air vents allow air to circulate through the system to cool down the components. TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. Wireless WAN Module Compartment The Wireless WAN module compartment contains the WWAN device. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary to open this compartment. Battery Latches The battery latches are used to secure the Lithium ion battery in the battery bay. Lithium ion Battery Bay The battery bay contains the internal Lithium ion battery. It can be opened for the removal of the battery when stored over a long period of time or for swapping a discharged battery with a charged Lithium ion battery. See Lithium ion Battery on page 68. Cleanable Dust Filter The dust filter is used to help remove dust and dirt fin your system. See Cleaning the dust filter on page 111. Port Replicator Connector This connector allows you to connect the optional Port Replicator to your Tablet PC. 23 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Power Indicator Battery 1 Level Optical/Hard Drive Access Battery Charging Battery 2 Level NumLk ScrLk CapsLk Security Figure 7. Status Indicator Panel Status Indicator Panel There are two Status Indicator Panels on your notebook: on the left front and under the display. The Status Indicator Panels display symbols and associated LEDs that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. These symbols tell you how each of those components is operating.(Figure 7) Power Indicator The Power indicator symbol shows whether your system is operational. It has several different states, each of which tells you what mode your Tablet PC is in at that time. 24 - Status Indicator Panel Steady On (Blue): This means that there is power to your Tablet PC and that it is ready for use. Flashing: This means that your Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. Steady Off: This means that your system is either in Hibernate mode, or that your tablet has been turned off. If you are charging your battery, the Power indicator symbol will remain on even if your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is shut off. Even if the system was shut down from Windows, the Power indicator symbol will remain on if you have an adapter connected. Battery Charging Indicators The Battery Charging and Battery Level indicators state whether the Lithium ion battery (Battery 1) or the optional modular battery (Battery 2) are installed and charging. 111 2 Battery Level Indicator The Battery Level indicators display the charge level of the indicated battery pack, as follows:

Green, solid: Battery is between 51% and 100% charged. Orange, solid: Battery is between 13% and 50% charged. Red, solid: Battery is between 0% and 12% charged. Orange, blinking: Blinks during battery status measurement (Four seconds after the battery is installed). Red, blinking: There is a problem with the battery. Off: There is no battery installed. IF THE BATTERY PACK IS INSTALLED WHILE THE POWER IS TURNED OFF, THE BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR WILL DISPLAY THE CHARGE LEVEL FOR FIVE SECONDS AFTER IT BLINKS ORANGE. IF THE AC ADAPTER IS NOT CONNECTED OR THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT FULLY CHARGED WHEN THE COMPUTER IS SWITCHED TO SLEEP MODE, THE INDICATOR WILL BLINK. THE LED BLINKS AT THE RATE OF ONE SECOND ON/FIVE SECONDS OFF. BATTERIES SUBJECTED TO SHOCKS, VIBRATION OR EXTREME TEMPERATURES CAN BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED. A SHORTED BATTERY IS DAMAGED AND MUST BE REPLACED. 25 - Status Indicator Panel Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access Indicator The Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access indicator shows whether your internal hard drive or optical drive are being accessed is being accessed. Security Indicator The Security Indicator flashes (if a password was set) when the system resumes from Off or Sleep modes. You must enter the password that was set in the Security Panel before your system will resume operation. NumLk Indicator The NumLk indicator states that the integral keyboard is set in ten-key numeric keypad mode. CapsLock Indicator The CapsLock indicator states that your keyboard is set to type in all capital letters. ScrLk Indicator The ScrLk indicator states that your scroll lock is active. 26 - Status Indicator Panel Display Panel Figure 8. Opening the Display Panel Display Panel Your LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC contains an LED display panel that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments. The convertible design of your Tablet PC allows you to open the display fully, rotate it in either direction 180 degrees, and lay it face up on the keyboard. This allows you to use the system as a tablet, much as you would a pad of paper. Opening the Display Panel Simply lift the display up and backwards, (being careful not to touch the screen with your fingers), until it is at a comfortable viewing angle. (Figure 8) 27 - Display Panel Using the System as a Tablet If you would like to use the system as a tablet, perform the following steps. THE DISPLAY CAN BE ROTATED IN EITHER DIRECTION, BUT WHEN RETURNING THE SYSTEM TO NOTEBOOK MODE, BE SURE TO TURN IT BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL POSITION (I.E., THE REVERSE OF HOW YOU TURNED IT WHEN YOU OPENED IT. TURNING THE DISPLAY IN THE INCORRECT DIRECTION COULD CAUSE HINGE DAMAGE. IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, BE SURE TO POSITION THE DISPLAY PERPENDICULAR TO THE KEYBOARD, OTHERWISE THE KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY COVER COULD GET SCRATCHED. 1 Lift the display until it is perpendicular to the keyboard. (Figure 9). 2 When the display is perpendicular to the keyboard, rotate it 180 degrees in either direction (Figure 10) so that it is facing backwards. 3 Holding the top edge of the display panel, pull it forward until it is lying nearly atop the keyboard. 4 To return the system to notebook configuration, repeat steps 3 and 2. C A B D Figure 9. Fully Open Display Figure 10. Rotating Display Figure 11. Tablet Mode 28 - Display Panel Holding the Tablet PC Your computer can be used in tablet configuration in four different orientations: 0o, 90o, 180o, and 270o.

(Figure ). Letters associated with each orientation refer to the position of the system when the arrow is facing up.

(A) Portrait Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned vertically with the web camera on the

(B) 2nd Portrait Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned vertically with the web camera on

(C) Landscape Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned horizontally with the web camera on left. the right. the top. IF YOU HAVE A SYSTEM WITH A WIRELESS WAN MODULE INSTALLED, PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING: WHILE HOLDING THE SYSTEM HORIZONTALLY WITH THE WEB CAMERA AT THE BOTTOM (2ND LANDSCAPE ORIENTATION, AS NOTED BELOW) WWAN MUST NOT BE OPERATED WITH THE ANTENNA OPEN. OPERATING IN THIS POSITION COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE WWAN ANTENNA.

(D) 2nd Landscape Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned horizontally with the web camera on the bottom. Changing Auto Rotation Feature Your Tablet PC has an Auto Rotation utility that allows you to determine how you would like the display to act when the tablet is rotated. When Auto Rotation is enabled, the display will automatically rotate in the same direction as the screen. When you receive your Tablet PC, Pause and Automatic Pause are set as the defaults for the Auto Rotation utility. When Pause is enabled, the system will not enter Auto Rotate until it is enabled. When Automatic Pause state is enabled, the screen will not rotate automatically if it has been rotated by a means other than Auto Rotation (such as when using the rotate button on the tablet). If the system is in Automatic Pause state, there are several ways to resume Auto Rotate:

Position the display and screen in the same orientation. When the system wakes from standby or hibernate mode. 29 - Display Panel When the system is rebooted or a logoff/logon is performed. When the system is in Pause state, there are several ways to enable it:

Go to the Start menu > All Programs > Auto Rotation Utility, and click Resume. Right-click on the Auto Rotation Utility icon in the system tray and click Resume. Open the Fujitsu Menu by pressing the [A] button or by clicking the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray, then clicking the [AutoRotation Resume] button on the second page of the Fujitsu Menu. Adjusting Display Panel Brightness Once you have turned on your Tablet PC, you may want to adjust the brightness level of the screen to a more comfortable viewing level. There are three ways to adjust the brightness: keyboard, power management utility, and Fujitsu Menu. Using Keyboard to Adjust Brightness Adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the system setting (i.e., the settings you make via the function keys automatically changes the brightness settings in the systems Pen and Tablet Settings).

[Fn+F6]: Pressing repeatedly will lower the brightness of your display.

[Fn+F7]: Pressing repeatedly will increase the brightness of the display. Using Power Management to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness with the power management utility:

Click Start -> Control Panel. In View by:, select one of the icon views. Select Display, then click Adjust brightness in the left pane. Drag the Screen brightness: slider to the left or right, depending upon your preference. Using the Fujitsu Menu to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness using the Fujitsu menu, click on the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray in the lower right corner of the screen. (You can also open the Fujitsu menu by pressing the [A] button.) Scroll down to the Windows Mobility Center and double-click it, then double-click the icon adjacent to Display brightness. Set the screen brightness sliders for On battery and Plugged in scenarios. You can also use the Fujitsu Menu as a quick way to reduce the brightness to a minimum or increase it to a maximum. This is done by clicking the corresponding button in the Fujitsu Menu: LCD Brightness Min or LCD Brightness Max. 30 - Display Panel IF USING AC POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTING IS SET TO ITS HIGHEST LEVEL BY DEFAULT. IF USING BATTERY POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTINGS IS SET TO APPROXIMATELY MID-LEVEL BY DEFAULT. THE HIGHER THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL, THE MORE POWER THE TABLET PC WILL CONSUME AND THE FASTER YOUR BATTERIES WILL DISCHARGE. FOR MAXIMUM BATTERY LIFE, MAKE SURE THAT THE BRIGHTNESS IS SET AS LOW AS POSSIBLE. Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor This system has an ambient light sensor (just below the Tablet buttons) that automatically senses the light conditions in which the computer is operating. If the lighting is very bright, the brightness of the LCD will increase to make it easier to see the display. Conversely, if it is used in a darkened room, the display will automatically dim. NOTE THAT WHEN YOU FIRST START YOUR SYSTEM, THE AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR IS DISABLED. YOU WILL INITIALLY NEED TO ENABLE IT USING THE FOLLOWING STEPS. The light sensor can be enabled or disabled from the Control Panel as follows:

1 Open the system Control Panel and click in the View by: field, select either large or small icons. 2 Click on the Location and Other Sensors icon. 3 To enable or disable the Light Sensor utility, check or uncheck the box in the Enabled column. 4 For more information about the light sensor, click on Light Sensor in the Sensor column to open the Sensor Properties window. 5 From the Sensor Properties window, you can change the sensors description, uninstall the sensor, or enable or disable selected users. To change the sensors description, click the [Change description] button, enter the new description, and click the [OK] button. To limit who can access the sensors, click Change who can access sensors, then check or uncheck the box adjacent to the individual you would like to grant or prohibit access. To uninstall the sensor, click Uninstall this sensor. 31 - Display Panel Keyboard Function Keys Fn Key Start Key Numeric Keypad

(surrounded by heavy line) Figure 12. Keyboard Application Key Cursor Keys Using the Keyboard Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has an integral 84-key keyboard. The keys perform all the standard functions of a 101-key keyboard, including the Windows keys and other special function keys. This section describes the following keys (Figure 12):

Numeric keypad: Your Tablet PC allows certain keys to serve dual purposes, both as standard characters and as numeric and mathematical keys. The ability to toggle between the standard character and numeric keys is controlled through the [NumLk] key. 32 - Keyboard Cursor keys: Your keyboard contains four arrow keys for moving the cursor or insertion point to the right, left, up, or down within windows, applications and documents. Function keys: The keys labeled [F1] through [F12], are used in conjunction with the [Fn] key to produce special actions that vary depending on what program is running. Windows keys: These keys work with your Windows operating system and function the same as the onscreen Start menu button, or the right button on your pointing device. Numeric Keypad Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual functions as both standard character keys and numeric keypad keys. NumLk can be activated by pressing the [NumLk] keys. Turning off the NumLk feature is done the same way. Once this feature is activated you can enter numerals 0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ), multiplication

( * ), or division ( / ), and enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function keys. The keys in the numeric keypad are marked on the front edge of the key to indicate their secondary functions. Windows Keys Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has two Windows keys, consisting of a Start key and an Application key. The Start key displays the Start menu. This button functions the same as your onscreen Start menu button. The Application key functions the same as your right mouse button and displays shortcut menus for the selected item. (Please refer to your Windows Help and Support documentation in the Start menu for additional information regarding the Windows keys.) Cursor Keys The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the keyboard which allow you to move the cursor up, down, left and right in applications. In programs such as Windows Explorer, it moves the focus (selects the next item up, down, left, or right). 33 - Keyboard Function Keys Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has 12 function keys, F1 through F12. Functions assigned to these keys differ for each application. You should refer to your software documentation to find out how these keys are used. The [Fn] key provides extended functions for the Tablet PC and is always used in conjunction with another key.

[Fn+F2]: On backlit computers, pressing [F2] while holding [Fn] will toggle the backlight on (brighter) and off

(darker).

[Fn+F3]: Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Audio Mute on and off.

[Fn+F4]: Pressing [F4] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Quick Point feature on and off. Note that the [Fn+F4]

combination only works if Manual Setting is selected in the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61)

[Fn+F6]: Pressing [F6] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will lower the brightness of your display.

[Fn+F7]: Pressing [F7] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the brightness of the display.

[Fn+F8]: Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will decrease the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

[Fn+F9]: Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

[Fn+F10]: Pressing [F10] while holding [Fn] allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order, are:

built-in display panel only, external monitor only, and both built-in display panel and external monitor. 34 - Keyboard Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Left Button Cursor Control Right Button Figure 13. Touchpad pointing device Using the Touchpad The touchpad is built into your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. It is used to control the movement of the cursor to select items on your display panel. The touchpad is composed of a cursor control below the center of the keyboard and two buttons below it. The left button functions the same as a left mouse button while the right button has the same function as a right mouse button. The actual functionality of the buttons may vary depending on the application that is being used. 35 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Clicking Clicking means pushing and releasing a button. To left-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button once, and then immediately release it. To right-click, move the mouse cursor to the item you wish to select, press the right button once, and then immediately release it. You also have the option to perform the clicking operation by tapping lightly on the touchpad once. Figure 14. Clicking with button Figure 15. Clicking with Touchpad Figure 16. Right-clicking with button Double-Clicking Double-clicking means pushing and releasing the left button twice in rapid succession. This procedure does not function with the right button. To double-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button twice, and immediately release it. You can also perform a double-click operation by tapping lightly on the pad twice. Figure 17. Double-clicking with button Figure 18. Double-clicking with Touchpad 36 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen IF THE INTERVAL BETWEEN CLICKS IS TOO LONG, THE DOUBLE-CLICK WILL NOT BE EXECUTED. PARAMETERS FOR THE QUICK POINT CAN BE ADJUSTED FROM THE MOUSE DIALOG BOX LOCATED IN THE WINDOWS CONTROL PANEL. Dragging Dragging means pressing and holding the left button, while moving the cursor. To drag, move the cursor to the item you wish to move. Press and hold the left button while moving the item to its new location and then release it. Dragging can also be done using the Touchpad. First, tap the Touchpad twice over the item you wish to move making sure to leave your finger on the pad after the final tap. Next, move the object to its new location by moving your finger across the Touchpad, and then release your finger. Figure 19. Dragging with button Figure 20. Dragging with Touchpad Touchpad Control Adjustment The Windows Control Panel allows you to customize your touchpad with selections made from within the Mouse Properties dialog box. There are three aspects of operation which you can adjust:

Buttons: This tab lets you set up the buttons for right or left handed operation, in addition to setting up the time interval allowed between clicks in double-clicking. 37 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Pointers: This tab lets you set up the scheme for the cursor depending on its functionality. Pointer Options: This tab lets you set up a relation between the speed of your finger motion and the speed of the cursor. It also allows you to enable a Pointer Trail for the cursor arrow. Active Digitizer Display NOTE: Your system has a capacitive touch panel that responds to finger touch and gestures. (This configuration is called a Dual Digitizer.) For more information about the touchscreen, refer to Using the Capacitive Touchscreen on page 42. The integrated active digitizer allows you to use the included stylus as a pointing device. You can use the stylus to click, double-click, right-click, drag items and icons, write text, or to draw and erase like a pen or pencil in applications that support this behavior, such as drawing or painting programs. The front half of the barrel button works the same as a right-click button. The back half of the barrel button and the eraser button on the end of the pen both act as erasers. If using the eraser button, be sure to depress it by pressing it on the display in order to activate the eraser function. Figure 21. Using Active Digitizer Display 38 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Right-Click Toggle Eraser Button Eraser Toggle Pen Tether Attachment Point Figure 22. Stylus Features DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING OR WRITING ON THE SCREEN WITH THE STYLUS. EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR ACTIVE DIGITIZER. TO PURCHASE ADDITIONAL OR REPLACEMENT STYLUSES, VISIT THE FUJITSU ACCESSORIES WEBSITE AT: WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. Clicking on Active Digitizer Display To left-click, touch the object you wish to select and then lift the stylus tip immediately (Figure 23). Right-Clicking on Active Digitizer Right-click can be accomplished by holding the front of the toggle button down while tapping on the screen

(Figure 24). To turn off the right-click feature, go to Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Pen and Touch. 39 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Figure 23. Clicking on the Active Digitizer Display Figure 24. Right-clicking Active Digitizer Double-Clicking To double-click, touch the item twice, and then immediately remove the stylus tip (Figure 25). Figure 25. Double-clicking the Display 40 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Dragging Dragging means moving an item with the stylus by touching the screen, moving and then lifting the stylus. To drag, touch the Active Digitizer Display with your stylus on the item you wish to move. While continuing to touch the screen with the stylus, drag the item to its new location by moving the stylus across the screen, and then lifting the stylus to release it (Figure 26). Calibrating the Active Digitizer Display In order to ensure accurate tracking between the stylus and cursor, you must run the Calibration Utility before you use the system for the first time, or after you change the display resolution. Figure 26. Dragging on the Display THE FIRST TIME YOU PERFORM A CALIBRATION, THE SYSTEM DISPLAY SHOULD BE IN LANDSCAPE MODE. SUBSEQUENT CALIBRATIONS CAN BE PERFORMED IN LANDSCAPE OR PORTRAIT MODE. THE FIRST TIME YOU CALIBRATE, THERE WILL BE 16 CALIBRATION POINTS; SUBSEQUENT CALIBRATIONS WILL REQUIRE ONLY FOUR CALIBRATION POINTS. To run the calibration utility:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Click Hardware and Sound, then select Tablet PC Settings 3 Under the Display tab, click the [Calibrate] button.(Note: If you have the optional capacitive touchscreen, you will need to click on either Pen input or Touch input, depending upon which method you want to calibrate.) 4 Adjust the display of your Tablet PC to a comfortable angle and find the (+) symbol in the upper-left corner of the display. 41 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING ON THE SCREEN DURING CALIBRATION. USE OF EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR TOUCH PANEL. 5 Depending upon whether you are calibrating pen input or touch input, firmly touch the screen with the stylus or your finger directly on the (+) symbol. Lift the stylus or your finger from the screen and the target will move to a different location on the screen. 6 Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the (+) symbols. 7 Once you have selected all the symbols, press the [OK] button. 8 Touch the stylus or your finger to various points on the screen to verify that the screen is correctly calibrated. If you are not satisfied with the screens calibration, press the [Calibrate]) button to begin again. Using the Capacitive Touchscreen This Tablet PC has a dual digitizer that allows you to use either the stylus or your finger(s) as a pointing device. This type of display also allows you to use gestures to perform such actions as scroll, zoom, and rotate. GESTURE SUPPORT IS DETERMINED BY THE APPLICATION IN USE. WHEN ONE FINGER IS USED ON THE TOUCHSCREEN, IT BEHAVES IN THE SAME MANNER AS A STYLUS. THE STYLUS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER FINGER TOUCH. IF THE STYLUS IS WITHIN ACTIVE RANGE OF THE SCREEN, FINGER TOUCH WILL BE DISABLED. General Gesture Mode: One- and Two-Finger Gestures Right-clicking the touchscreen To perform a right-click action using two fingers, press the first finger at the location you want to perform a right-click, then quickly tap and release the second finger on the screen. 42 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Gesture Mode To initiate gesture mode, two fingers must touch the screen within 200 ms of each other. If the second finger touches the screen after 200 ms has elapsed, the second finger is ignored. If more than two fingers touch the screen in that time, Advanced Gesture Mode is activated instead. When Gesture Mode is activated, no cursor movement is sent to the system. When both fingers are removed, Gesture mode ends. When a third finger is added, gesture mode ends and Advanced gesture mode is activated. Note that if a gesture cant be recognized, no action is taken. In that case, remove both fingers from the screen and try again. Scrolling Gesture To scroll through long documents or on a web page, place both fingers on the screen (one finger quickly followed by the second). If at least one finger has moved at least 3 mm, a scroll is considered. If both fingers are moving in the same direction and parallel (given a tolerance of 5 mm), Scroll Mode is activated. If one finger is stationary, it is not considered a scroll. If either finger is lifted, Scroll Mode is canceled. Zoom Gesture The zoom gesture is especially helpful when viewing pictures. To zoom in, place two fingers on the item you want to enlarge (one finger quickly followed by the second), then spread them away from each other. If at least one finger has moved at least 10 mm, a zoom event is considered. If the distance between the fingers has changed by at least 10 mm, and both fingers have stayed on approximately the same line, Zoom Mode is entered. If either finger strays more than 10 mm from the "zoom line" created when the fingers first made contact, the zoom is canceled. To zoom out, place two fingers on the item you want to reduce (one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them towards each other. Rotate Gesture To change the orientation of an object on the screen, place two fingers on the image you want to rotate (one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them in opposite directions (as if you were turning a knob). The direction the item turns is dependant upon the direction you move your fingers. 43 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen If at least one finger moves at least 12 mm, a rotate is considered. If one finger is stationary (moving less than 5 mm in any direction), and the other is moving, a rotate is considered. If the fingers begin moving in the same direction, the rotation is canceled. If the distance between the fingers changes by more than 10 mm, the rotation is canceled. Installing a Pen Tether To prevent dropping or losing your pen, you should attach it to your system using the pen tether that is included with the system. To attach the pen tether to your Tablet PC, perform the following steps:

1 Attach the end of the pen tether with the smaller loop to your pen. To do so, push the end of the tether through the hole in the pen, then thread the opposite end of the tether through the loop. 2 Attach the end of the pen tether with the larger loop to the attachment point on your tablet. To do so, insert the end of the pen tether through the attachment point, then feed the pen through the large loop in the tether. Figure 27. Installing a Pen Tether 44 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Volume Control Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has multiple volume controls which interact with each other. ANY SOFTWARE THAT CONTAINS AUDIO FILES WILL ALSO CONTAIN A VOLUME CONTROL OF ITS OWN. IF YOU INSTALL AN EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE THAT HAS AN INDEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL, THE HARDWARE VOLUME CONTROL AND THE SOFTWARE VOLUME CONTROL WILL INTERACT WITH EACH OTHER. IT SHOULD BE NOTED THAT IF YOU SET YOUR SOFTWARE VOLUME TO OFF, YOU WILL OVERRIDE THE EXTERNAL VOLUME CONTROL SETTING. Controlling the Volume The volume can be controlled in several different ways:

Volume can be changed or muted from within the Volume Control in the system tray. Volume can be controlled using the Volume Up and Volume Down buttons on the button panel Volume can be controlled with the F8 and F9 functions keys. Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will decrease the volume of your Tablet PC. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC. Volume can be changed by opening the Control Panel and selecting Windows Mobility Center. From there, you can either mute or adjust the sound in the Volume area. Volume can be muted by pressing the [F3] key while holding down the [Fn] key. To restore audio, repeat the

[Fn+F3] procedure. Volume can be controlled by many volume controls that are set within individual applications. Certain external audio devices you might connect to your system may have hardware volume controls. Each source discussed above puts an upper limit on the volume level that must then be followed by the other sources. We recommend that you experiment with the various volume controls to discover the optimal sound level. 45 - Volume Control Modular Bay Figure 28. Modular Bay Modular Bay Devices Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC contains a Modular Bay. The Modular Bay can house an optical drive, a Lithium ion battery, and a weight saver. Your Modular Bay will have one of the following devices installed. Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: This allows you to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs and record to DVD, CD, and DVD-RAM discs. Modular Blu-ray RW Drive. This drive allows you to read from and write to Blu-ray discs. Modular Lithium ion battery: This is a rechargeable battery that can be used to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when an adapter is not connected. Weight Saver: This is used to fill the bay when no device is needed. YOU SHOULD NEVER LEAVE YOUR MODULAR BAY EMPTY WHEN THE TABLET PC IS IN OPERATION. IF LEFT EMPTY, DUST OR FOREIGN MATTER MAY ACCUMULATE INSIDE THE TABLET PC. Removing and Installing Modular Devices There are two ways to remove and install modular devices in the Modular Bay:

Cold-swapping: swapping devices while your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is powered off. Hot-swapping: swapping devices while your system is active using the Safely Remove Hardware icon from your system tray. 46 - Modular Bay Devices Cold-swapping To cold-swap modular devices in your Modular Bay follow these easy steps:

1 Close any open files and shut down your LifeBook notebook. 2 Pull out the Flexible Bay release latch. This will push your device out slightly, allowing you to remove it. 3 Slide your device out until it is clear of the bay. This will require light force. 4 Slide the device you are installing into your notebook until it clicks into place. 5 It is now safe to turn your notebook back on. 6 You can now access and use the device. Your Tablet PC will automatically detect the device and activate it within your system. The drive letters associated with the device will be created and listed under My Computer and Windows Explorer. Hot-swapping Hot-swapping is provided through the Safely Remove Hardware utility. The icon for the utility appears in the system tray. Click on the icon and follow the on-screen instructions. 47 - Modular Bay Devices Modular Bay Release Latch Figure 29. Removing/Installing Modular Device Modular Bay Device Windows Button Power Button shown for reference only) Figure 30. LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC Security/Tablet PC Buttons LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons A unique feature of your LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC is the array of Security and Tablet PC buttons as well as a standalone Windows button. These buttons allow you to secure your Tablet PC from unauthorized use and to launch specific applications and functions with the touch of a button. Security Button Functions If the security system is activated, upon starting your Tablet PC or resuming from Hibernate or shutdown mode, the security system will require you to enter a password code using the security buttons. After you enter the correct password, your system will resume operation. The five security/Tablet PC buttons are located on the bottom right-hand side of the display when it is configured to be used as a notebook. All five buttons are used when implementing security functions. Four of the buttons are used to enter the password;

the fifth is used as an Enter button. See Table 3 for information about each Security button. 48 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Button Icon System State Security Panel Function System is pre-boot or resuming from suspend Security Button 1 Security Button 2 Security Button 3 Security Button 4 Security Enter Button Table 3. Security Panel Button Functions 49 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Post-logon button functions All six buttons can be used after logging on. See Table 3 for information about each of the post-logon functions. Button Icon System State Tablet PC Function System is post-logon (Windows desktop is displayed) Windows Button has two functions. Primary action: opens up the Start menu

[Windows] button + [Power] button: Opens up CTRL+ALT+DEL screen Volume Down Volume Up Pauses and resumes the rotation lock feature. Opens the Fujitsu Menu utility Opens the Windows Journal application. Table 3. Post-logon Tablet PC Button Functions Windows Button In post-logon, the Windows button can be used to perform two functions. When pressed alone, it opens up the Start menu. When pressed at the same time as the power button, it acts the same as if pressing [Ctl] + [Alt] + [Del]. 50 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Volume Down/Volume Up Buttons The Volume Down and Volume Up buttons allow you to decrease and increase the volume. Rotation Lock The rotation lock feature is used to Pause or Resume the auto rotation feature. When the system is in tablet mode, if the auto rotation feature is resumed, the display rotates automatically when the system is rotated. When the auto rotation feature is paused, the display doesn't rotate automatically when the tablet is rotated. Button A When Button A is pressed post-logon, the Fujitsu Menu utility opens. When Button A is pressed, the Battery LED shows the remaining capacity of the battery (See Status Indicator Panel on page 24.) Five seconds after releasing the button, the LED will turn off automatically. Button B When Button B is pressed post-logon, the Windows Journal opens. Changing Tablet PC Button Functions The Application A and B buttons can be changed to launch a program or perform an action you select. By default, the Application A button launches the Calculator, and the Application B button launches MS Journal. To launch different applications or cause the Application A or B buttons to perform a specific action:

1 Double-click on the Tablet PC Settings icon in the Control Panel. 2 Select the Buttons tab and select the button you would like to change from the list. 3 Click [Change] and open the drop down list in the Press: field. 4 Select the action you would like the button to perform. If you want to launch a program, click on Start a Program, then browse to the location of the program. 5 Click [OK], then click [OK] again. The buttons will now perform the actions you have assigned to them. 51 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel When you receive your Tablet PC, the security panel application is pre-installed without any passwords. The following sections provide detailed information on your security panel, how to set, change or remove passwords. Numbered Buttons Use these buttons to enter your password. Enter Button After entering the button strokes, push this button to enter the password into the Tablet PC. Passwords The user and supervisor password may be set on this Tablet PC. A supervisor password is typically the same for all tablets and notebooks in a work group, office, or company to allow for system management. Individual computers in a group environment should not use a common password. A password consists of one to five button strokes plus the enter button. A valid stroke consists of pushing one or up to four buttons simultaneously. The following are valid button strokes:

Pushing [4] by itself Pushing [2] and [3] at the same time Pushing [1], [2], and [4] at the same time Pushing [1], [2], [3], and [4] at the same time The following are valid passwords. The numbers within braces ({ }) are button strokes using more than one button.

{[2]+[3]}, [1], [Enter]

[4], [enter]

{[1]+[3]}, {[2]+[3]+[4]}, [1], [4], [2], [Enter]

Setting Passwords When shipped from the factory, no passwords are set. You have a choice of having no password or setting a supervisor and user password. You must set the supervisor password before the user password. 52 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons THE PURPOSE OF SUPERVISOR PASSWORD IS TO BE ABLE TO BYPASS THE USER PASSWORD IN CASE THE USER PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD ALONE WILL NOT LOCK THE SYSTEM. YOU MUST SET THE SUPERVISOR AND USER PASSWORDS FOR THE SECURITY PANEL TO WORK. Setting Supervisor Password You must have set a supervisor password before setting any user passwords. The supervisor password can bypass the user password. 1 Go to the Start menu. 2 Click on Run. 3 Type in: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\ FJSECS.EXE, then press [Enter]

4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the Supervisor password. Setting User Password 1 Go to the Start menu. 2 Click on All Programs. 3 Click on Security Panel Application -> Security Panel Application. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the user password. YOU MAY CHANGE OR REMOVE THE SUPERVISOR OR USER PASSWORD BY REPEATING THE STEPS DEFINED ABOVE. 53 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel The security lock feature is in effect both when the system resumes from Off or Hibernation state. You always need to push the Security Panel buttons to input the user password. Your system will not begin the boot sequence until you enter your supervisor/user password. From Off State 1 Turn on your system. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button (e.g., if the password is 22222, first press Button 2 five times, then press the Enter button). The Tablet PC will boot to normal operation. From Hibernation State 1 Press your Suspend/Resume slide. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button.The Tablet PC should resume normal operation. Incorrect Password Entry If an invalid supervisor or user password is entered three times in succession, the system will beep for about one minute. If a valid password is entered within a minute (while system beeps), the beeping will stop and the Tablet PC will resume normal operation. If no password is entered or an invalid password is entered while the system beeps, the system will return to its previous locked state (off) and the Security Indicator will go off. To reactivate the Tablet PC after a password failure, you must press the Suspend/Resume slide, then enter a correct password. REMEMBER THE USER PASSWORD YOU SPECIFIED ON THE SECURITY PANEL APPLICATION. IF YOU FORGET THE PASSWORD YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR COMPUTER. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD CAN OVERRIDE THE USER PASSWORD. Precautions Opening and Closing the Cover To change what the system does when the cover is closed:

54 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons 1 Open the system Control Panel. If the display is in Category view, click one of the icon selections in the View by:

field. Click on Power Options. 2 Click Choose what closing the lid does in the left pane. 3 Select the desired action for When I close the lid, then click the [Save changes] button. Low Battery Operations If your Tablet PC has a low battery, pushing the suspend/resume slide only turns on the Security Indicator. Your Tablet PC does not unlock, the Security Indicator turns off after one minute. To resume normal operation, first attach a power supply to the Tablet PC. Then you may unlock the Tablet PC. Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application You have two options when uninstalling the security panel application:

Remove passwords and uninstall the security panel application software. This will disable all security features. Uninstall the security panel application with password still active. This will not allow any changes to the password. Uninstalling the Security Panel Application Software Remove passwords when User wants no password protection whatsoever and doesnt want to give anybody the utility to set a password on their computer. In this case, if passwords (supervisor, user, or both) are set, the passwords must first be cleared BEFORE removing the application. To clear passwords, follow same procedure in SETTING PASSWORD CODES except this time, select REMOVE, enter current password then click Next. When asked to confirm select Yes. Removing Security Panel Application with Passwords Still Active Using this feature will not allow any changes to the password. REMOVING THE APPLICATIONS DOES NOT REMOVE THE PASSWORD. IT SIMPLY REMOVES THE ABILITY TO CHANGE/ADD/REMOVE PASSWORDS. TO CHANGE YOUR PASSWORD YOU MUST REINSTALL THE APPLICATION. 55 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons User:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Programs and Features in the Control Panel. 3 Select Security Panel for User in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. Supervisor:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Add or Remove Programs Properties in the Control Panel. 3 Select the Security Panel for Supervisor in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. Reinstalling the Security Panel Application To reinstall the supervisor or user security application, you will need to access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility allows you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. To access the FSDM utility, you will need to go to the Support Site at

<http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS>tal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. The Security/Application Panel software consists of two software packages: Security Application Panel/Supervisor and Security Application Panel/User. 1 Download both software packages to your system from the support website. 2 Double-click setupS.exe in the Security Application Panel\Supervisor package. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. 3 Double-click setup.exe from Security Application Panel\User package. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. 56 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has four possible power sources: a primary Lithium ion battery, a secondary modular bay battery, an AC adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. Connecting the Power Adapters The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your Tablet PC and charging the batteries. Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet. Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your Tablet PC. 2 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile, or, 3 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. 57 DC Power Jack AC Adapter Figure 31. Connecting the AC Adapter Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power 1 Be sure that you have at least one charged battery installed. 2 Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED UPON PURCHASE. INITIALLY, YOU WILL NEED TO CONNECT EITHER THE AC ADAPTER OR THE AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER TO USE YOUR TABLET PC. 58 - Power Sources Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power On Power/Suspend/Resume Slide The Power/Suspend/Resume slide is used to turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from its off state. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium ion battery, you can power on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. WHEN YOU TURN ON YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC BE SURE YOU HAVE A POWER SOURCE. THIS MEANS THAT AT LEAST ONE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AND CHARGED, OR THAT THE AC OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER IS CONNECTED AND HAS POWER. To turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from its off state, slide the Power/Suspend/Resume slide, located above the keyboard to the right. When you are done working you can either leave your Tablet PC in Suspend mode, you can turn it off. See Sleep Mode on page 64 and Powering Off on page 66 Power/Suspend/Resume Slide Figure 32. Starting the Tablet PC DO NOT CARRY YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC AROUND WITH THE POWER ON OR SUBJECT IT TO SHOCKS OR VIBRATION, AS YOU RISK DAMAGING YOUR TABLET PC. 59 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC When you power on your LIFEBOOK, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC will emit an audio warning and/or an error message will be displayed. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the POST, your Tablet PC will load your operating system. NEVER TURN OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC DURING THE POWER ON SELF TEST (POST) OR IT WILL CAUSE AN ERROR MESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED WHEN YOU TURN YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC ON THE NEXT TIME. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. Boot Sequence The procedure for starting-up your Tablet PC is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your Tablet PCs BIOS. When your Tablet PC is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instructions to start up your Tablet PC. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your Tablet PC, it goes through a boot sequence which displays a Fujitsu logo until the operating system is found. During booting, your Tablet PC is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test (POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. The boot sequence is executed when:

You turn on the power to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. You restart your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from the Windows Shut Down dialog box. The software initiates a system restart; for example, when you install a new application. 60 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Hard Disk Drive Passwords To provide additional security for your data, you can assign passwords to your hard disk drive(s). This feature is managed in the system BIOS Setup Utility. See BIOS Setup Utility below for information about accessing the utility. REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORDS. IF YOU SET AND FORGET YOUR USER AND MASTER HARD DISK PASSWORDS, FUJITSU AMERICA WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RESET IT. YOU MAY LOSE DATA AND HAVE TO REPLACE YOUR SYSTEM BOARD OR HARD DISK DRIVE. BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility sets up the operating environment for your Tablet PC. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your Tablet PC. The BIOS Setup Utility also allows you to configure such features as the System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility To enter the BIOS Setup Utility do the following:

1 Turn on or restart your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, press the [F2] key once the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. Press the right or left arrow keys key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. BIOS Guide A guide to your Tablet PCs BIOS is available online at our service and support Website at:

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Once there, select Users Guides under Online Support. Select your Product, Series, and Model, then click [Go]. IF YOUR DATA SECURITY SETTINGS REQUIRE IT, YOU MAY BE ASKED FOR A PASSWORD BEFORE THE BIOS MAIN MENU WILL APPEAR. 61 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Booting the System We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices or put a DVD/CD in your drive until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Starting Windows the First Time After you boot up the system the first time and follow the instructions on the screen, you will eventually come to the Welcome window. After the Welcome window appears, the screen will black out for up to several minutes. This is normal. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO POWER DOWN THE SYSTEM AT THIS POINT. While the screen is blacked out, your system configuration is being set up and the necessary files are being installed. During the course of the first start up, you will need to read and accept the End User License Agreements (EULAs) for Microsoft and Fujitsu. IF YOU REJECT THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU WILL BE ASKED TO REVIEW THE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR INFORMATION ON RETURNING WINDOWS OR TO SHUT DOWN YOUR TABLET PC. YOU CANNOT USE YOUR TABLET PC UNTIL YOU HAVE ACCEPTED THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU STOP THE PROCESS YOUR TABLET PC WILL RETURN TO THE BEGINNING OF THE WINDOWS WELCOME PROCESS, EVEN IF YOU SHUT YOUR TABLET PC DOWN AND START IT UP AGAIN. Several additional windows will appear, prompting you to enter a name and description for your computer, an Administrator password, and a domain name. Read the instructions on the screens carefully and fill in the information as directed. Installing Bonus Apps After you have started your system the first time, you will see a Bonus Apps icon on your desktop. Click on the icon to see which additional applications are available for you to install. Applications that are already installed appear in grey; those that are available for installation appear in blue. Select the applications you wish to install by selecting the checkbox adjacent to your selection, or click [Select All] if you would like to install all available applications. Once you have made your selections, click [Install]. 62 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Note that in some cases (depending upon which application was selected for installation) after installation completes, the system will prompt you to reboot. There are also cases in which if multiple applications are selected to install but one of them needs a reboot, the system will reboot and continue installing the rest of the selected applications. Registering your LIFEBOOK with Fujitsu You can register your Tablet PC by going to our website at: https://store.shopfujitsu.com/fpc/Ecommerce/Service.jsp. You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to register online. 63 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power Management Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your operating conditions, such as those for the display brightness. Internal power management for your Tablet PC may be controlled from settings made in your operating system, pre-bundled power management application, or from settings made in BIOS setup utility. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. Power/Suspend/Resume Slide When your Tablet PC is active, the Power/Suspend/Resume slide can be used to manually put the Tablet PC into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide when the Tablet PC is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the button. If your Tablet PC is suspended, pushing the Power/Suspend/Resume slide returns your Tablet PC to active operation. You can tell whether the system is Suspended by looking at the Power indicator. If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your Tablet PC is fully operational. If the indicator is visible and flashing, your Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. If the indicator is not visible, the power is off or your Tablet PC is in Hibernation mode. Sleep Mode Sleep mode in Windows saves the contents of your system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode turns off the CPU, display, hard drive, and all other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and for restarting. Your Tablet PC can be put in sleep mode by:

Pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume slide when your system is turned on. Selecting Sleep after clicking [Start] then clicking the small arrow at the bottom right of the window. Timing out from lack of activity. Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. 64 - Power Management Your Tablet PCs system memory typically stores the file on which you are working, open application information, and any other data required to support operations in progress. When you resume operation from Sleep mode, your Tablet PC will return to the point where it left off. You must use the Power/Suspend/Resume slide to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your Tablet PC will not resume. IF RUNNING YOUR TABLET PC ON BATTERY POWER, BE AWARE THAT THE BATTERY CONTINUES TO DISCHARGE WHILE YOUR TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, THOUGH NOT AS QUICKLY AS WHEN FULLY OPERATIONAL. DISABLING THE POWER/SUSPEND/RESUME SLIDE PREVENTS IT FROM BEING USED TO PUT THE TABLET PC INTO SLEEP OR HIBERNATION (SAVE-

TO-DISK) MODE. THE BUTTON RESUME FUNCTION CANNOT BE DISABLED. IF YOUR TABLET PC IS ACTIVELY ACCESSING INFORMATION WHEN YOU ENTER THE SLEEP OR HIBERNATION MODE, CHANGES TO OPEN FILES ARE NOT LOST. THE FILES ARE LEFT OPEN AND MEMORY IS KEPT ACTIVE DURING SLEEP MODE OR THE MEMORY IS TRANSFERRED TO THE INTERNAL HARD DRIVE DURING HIBERNATION MODE. THE MAIN ADVANTAGE OF USING HIBERNATION IS THAT POWER IS NOT REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN YOUR DATA. THIS IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT IF YOU WILL BE LEAVING YOUR TABLET PC IN A SUSPENDED STATE FOR A PROLONGED PERIOD OF TIME. THE DRAWBACK OF USING HIBERNATION MODE IS THAT IT LENGTHENS THE POWER DOWN AND POWER UP SEQUENCES AND RESETS PERIPHERAL DEVICES. Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your Tablet PCs system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. You can enable or disable this feature. Enable or Disable the Hibernation Feature The default settings are not enabled. To enable or disable the Hibernation feature follow these steps:

1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, then select the Power Options icon. 2 Select Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does, then make your selections (Do Nothing, Sleep, Hibernate, or Shut Down). Windows Power Management The Power Options icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Options to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the Tablet PC on battery power or one of the adapters. 65 - Power Management Restarting the System If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Restart from the list. TURNING OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC WITHOUT EXITING WINDOWS OR TURNING ON YOUR TABLET PC WITHIN 10 SECONDS OF THE SYSTEM BEING SHUT OFF MAY CAUSE AN ERROR WHEN YOU START THE NEXT TIME. Powering Off Before turning off the power, check that the hard drive/optical drive access indicator is off. If you turn off the power while accessing a disk there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your Tablet PC shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down procedure. BE SURE TO CLOSE ALL FILES, EXIT ALL APPLICATIONS, AND SHUT DOWN YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM PRIOR TO TURNING OFF THE POWER. IF FILES ARE OPEN WHEN YOU TURN THE POWER OFF, YOU WILL LOSE ANY CHANGES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SAVED, AND MAY CAUSE DISK ERRORS. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your Tablet PC to complete its operations and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:

1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Shut Down from the list. If you are going to store your Tablet PC for a month or more, see Care and Maintenance Section. 66 - Power Management ENERGY STAR Compliance Your Fujitsu system is an ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PC. By choosing a computer with the latest energy-saving technology, youre helping to preserve our environment for future generations. ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, U.S. Department of Energy, Natural Resources Canada, and other governments around the world helping us save money while protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. With energy costs and global warming top-of-mind for consumers, Fujitsu is committed to offering solutions that help consumers conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. Sleep Mode:

You will notice that your computer is initially set so that the display turns off after 15 minutes of user inactivity, and the computer goes into Sleep mode after 20 minutes of user inactivity. When going into Sleep mode, the computer also reduces the speed of any active Ethernet network links. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, press the Suspend/Resume Button. Energy saving benefits:

Fujitsu ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PCs use about half as much electricity as standard equipment saving half in utility costs. But more than that, ENERGY STAR also makes a difference for the environment. Did you know that the average house can be responsible for twice the greenhouse gas emissions as the average car? Thats because every time you flip on a light switch, run your dishwasher, or turn on your PC, you use energy, which means more greenhouse gas emissions from power plants. So the more energy we can save through energy efficiency, the more we help to reduce greenhouse gases and the risks of global warming. To learn more about the important ENERGY STAR program, visit: www.energystar.gov. To read about how Fujitsu is supporting Sustainable Management along with several other environmental activities, visit the Fujitsu Corporate Citizenship page at:

http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/aboutus/environmental/environment.php 67 - Power Management Chapter 3 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has a Lithium ion battery that provides power for operating your Tablet PC when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or other hazards. The Lithium ion battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:

When used at temperatures that exceed a low of 5C or a high of 35C (41 to 95 F). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery that is outside its operating temperature range. When using a high current device such as a modem, external optical drive, or the hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. DO NOT LEAVE A FAULTY BATTERY IN YOUR TABLET PC. IT MAY DAMAGE YOUR AC ADAPTER, OPTIONAL AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER, ANOTHER BATTERY OR YOUR TABLET PC ITSELF. IT MAY ALSO PREVENT OPERATION OF YOUR TABLET PC BY DRAINING ALL AVAILABLE CURRENT INTO THE BAD BATTERY. 68 ACTUAL BATTERY LIFE WILL VARY BASED ON SCREEN BRIGHTNESS, APPLICATIONS, FEATURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS, BATTERY CONDITION AND OTHER CUSTOMER PREFERENCES. OPTICAL DRIVE OR HARD DRIVE USAGE MAY ALSO HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON BATTERY LIFE. THE BATTERY CHARGING CAPACITY IS REDUCED AS THE BATTERY AGES. IF YOUR BATTERY IS RUNNING LOW QUICKLY, YOU SHOULD REPLACE IT WITH A NEW ONE. UNDER FEDERAL, STATE, OR LOCAL LAW IT MAY BE ILLEGAL TO DISPOSE OF BATTERIES BY PUTTING THEM IN THE TRASH. PLEASE TAKE CARE OF OUR ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSE OF BATTERIES PROPERLY. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY FOR DETAILS REGARDING RECYCLING OR DISPOSING OF OLD BATTERIES. IF YOU CANNOT FIND THIS INFORMATION ELSEWHERE, CONTACT YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE AT 1-800-

8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Recharging the Batteries If you want to know the condition of the primary Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. The Lithium ion battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and connect the AC or Auto/Airline adapter. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERCENTAGE CHARGE IS INDICATED BY THE BATTERY CHARGING INDICATOR ON THE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL. There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion battery therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be significantly longer if your Tablet PC is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power Management on page 64 for more information on Sleep mode and shutdown procedure) 69 - Lithium ion Battery USING HEAVY CURRENT DEVICES OR FREQUENT EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESSES MAY PREVENT CHARGING COMPLETELY. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, a low battery notification message will appear. If you do not respond to the low battery message, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. When this happens, your Tablet PC will go into Sleep mode. There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once the Tablet PC reaches this point. ONCE THE LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE APPEARS, YOU NEED TO SAVE ALL YOUR ACTIVE DATA AND PUT YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC INTO SLEEP MODE UNTIL YOU CAN PROVIDE A NEW POWER SOURCE. YOU SHOULD PROVIDE A CHARGED BATTERY, AN AC POWER ADAPTER, OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. WHEN YOU ARE IN SLEEP MODE THERE MUST ALWAYS BE AT LEAST ONE POWER SOURCE ACTIVE. IF YOU REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES WHILE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, ANY DATA THAT HAS NOT BEEN SAVED TO THE HARD DRIVE WILL BE LOST. Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indicator just like the normal Sleep mode. Once your Tablet PC goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Power/Suspend/Resume slide to resume operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be maintained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your Tablet PC while an adapter is charging the battery. Shorted Batteries The Status Indicator panel indicator associated with the Battery Level indicator displays the operating level available in that battery. If this display shows a flashing red LED, it means the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it does not damage other parts of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 70 - Lithium ion Battery Replacing the Battery With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not charged. There are two ways to swap batteries, cold-swapping and hot-swapping:

Cold-swapping Batteries To cold-swap batteries in your battery bay, follow these easy steps:

1 Have a charged battery ready to install. 2 Shut down your Tablet PC and disconnect the AC adapter. 3 Turn the system upside down and orient it as shown in Figure 33. 4 While pushing the battery lock towards the battery, slide the batter release latch to the right, then lift the battery out of the bay as in Figure 34. 5 Insert a new battery into the bay, and press it in firmly so that the latches click into place. 6 Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on. Hot-swapping Batteries To hot-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these easy steps:

BE SURE TO PLUG IN AN AC ADAPTER PRIOR TO REMOVING THE BATTERY. THERE IS NO BRIDGE BATTERY PRESENT TO SUPPORT THE SYSTEM WHILE THE BATTERY IS BEING REPLACED. IF YOU DO NOT USE AN AC ADAPTER YOU WILL LOSE ANY UNSAVED FILES. 1 Plug an AC Adapter into the system and connect it to a power outlet. 2 Follow steps 3 through 6 in Cold Swapping Batteries. IF THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY CONNECTOR IS NOT FULLY SEATED, YOU MAY NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR TABLET PC OR CHARGE YOUR BATTERY. 71 - Lithium ion Battery s Battery lock Battery pack Battery release latch Figure 33. Unlatching a Battery Figure 34. Removing a Battery 72 - Lithium ion Battery SD Card Figure 35. Installing an SD Card Secure Digital Cards Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC supports Secure Digital (SD), Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC), and Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC) cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. Secure Digital (SD) Cards are flash memory technology that allows you to record, transfer and share digital content, such as digital pictures, movies, music, voice, and computer data and applications. SD Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery consumption. SD cards use flash memory architecture. 73 - Secure Digital Cards Installing SD Cards SD Cards are installed in the SD Card slot. To install an SD Card, follow these steps:

INSTALLING OR REMOVING AN SD CARD DURING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PCS SHUTDOWN OR BOOTUP PROCESS MAY DAMAGE THE CARD AND/OR YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC. DO NOT INSERT A CARD INTO A SLOT IF THERE IS WATER OR ANY OTHER SUBSTANCE ON THE CARD AS YOU MAY PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CARD, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR BOTH. 1 See your specific card manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your Tablet PC is off while installing them. 2 Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing an SD Card below. 3 Insert your card into the slot with the product label facing up. 4 Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. Removing an SD Card To remove an SD Card, follow these easy steps:

SEE YOUR CARD MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON THE REMOVAL OF YOUR CARD. SOME CARDS MAY REQUIRE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC TO BE IN SLEEP MODE OR OFF WHILE REMOVING THEM. 1 Select Safely Remove Hardware from the System Tray. Highlight the card in the list, then click [Stop]. 2 Push the SD Card in until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for removal. 74 - Secure Digital Cards Memory Upgrade Module Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC comes with a minimum of 2GB of high speed Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3-1600 SDRAM) factory installed. To increase your Tablet PCs memory capacity, you may install an additional memory upgrade module. The memory upgrade must be a dual-in-line (DIMM) SDRAM module. To ensure 100%

compatibility, purchase the SDRAM module only from the Fujitsu web store at www.shopfujitsu.com. DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS FROM THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE COMPARTMENT EXCEPT THE ONES SPECIFICALLY SHOWN IN THE DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE MODULE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE HANDLING A MEMORY MODULE, TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING MEMORY MODULES. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR THE MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. Installing Memory Upgrade Modules 1 Turn off power to your Tablet PC, remove any power adapter (AC or auto/airline). Remove the battery. 2 Make sure that all the connector covers are closed. 3 Turn the Tablet PC bottom side up, and remove the screw from the memory upgrade module compartment. 4 Lift and remove the cover from the memory module compartment (Figure 36). 5 Remove the memory upgrade module from the static guarded sleeve. 6 Align the memory upgrade module with the part side up. Align the connector edge of the memory upgrade module with the connector slot in the compartment.(Figure 37) 75 - Memory Upgrade Module Figure 36. Opening Memory Compartment 7 Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45 angle. Press the connector edge of the module firmly down and into the connector until it lodges under the retaining clip. Youll hear a click when it is properly in place. 8 Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS NOT SOMETHING YOU ROUTINELY REMOVE FROM YOUR TABLET PC. ONCE IT IS INSTALLED, YOU CAN LEAVE IT IN PLACE UNLESS YOU WANT TO CHANGE SYSTEM MEMORY CAPACITY. Figure 37. Installing a Memory Module 76 - Memory Upgrade Module Removing a Memory Upgrade Module 1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of Installing a Memory Upgrade Module. 2 Pull the clips sideways away from each side of the memory upgrade module at the same time. 3 While holding the clips out, remove the module by lifting it up and pulling it away from your Tablet PC. 4 Store the memory upgrade module in a static guarded sleeve. 5 Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. Figure 38. Removing a Memory Module Checking the Memory Capacity Once you have changed the system memory capacity by replacing the installed module with a larger one, be sure to check that your notebook has recognized the change. Check the memory capacity by clicking [Start] -> Settings -> Control Panel, then clicking the System icon. Check the amount of memory next to Installed memory (RAM):. IF THE TOTAL MEMORY DISPLAYED IS INCORRECT, CHECK THAT YOUR MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED. (IF THE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED AND THE CAPACITY IS STILL NOT CORRECTLY RECOGNIZED, SEE TROUBLESHOOTING ON PAGE 83. 77 - Memory Upgrade Module There may be a variation between the actual memory size and what is displayed. This is possible if your system is configured with an integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator which dynamically allocates system memory to accelerate graphics performance. IF THE TOTAL MEMORY DISPLAYED IS INCORRECT, CHECK THAT YOUR MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED. (IF THE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED AND THE CAPACITY IS STILL NOT CORRECTLY RECOGNIZED, SEE TROUBLESHOOTING ON PAGE 87. 78 - Memory Upgrade Module Device Ports Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and the optional Port Replicator come equipped with multiple ports to which you can connect external devices including: disk drives, keyboards, printers, etc. Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for a Gigabit (10Base-

T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. You may need to configure your Tablet PC to work with your particular network. (Please refer to your network administrator for information on your network configuration.) To connect the LAN cable follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN outlet. Port Replicator Connector The port replicator connector is used for the connection of your Tablet PC to an optional port replicator. In order to connect your Tablet PC to this device, refer to Port Replicator on page 83. Figure 39. Connecting the LAN 79 - Device Ports Universal Serial Bus Ports The Universal Serial Bus ports (USB) allow you to connect USB devices such as external game pads, pointing devices, keyboards and/or speakers. There are four USB ports on your Tablet PC; on the left-hand side are two USB 3.0 ports, one of which is an Anytime USB Charge port (See Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. on page 81) and there are USB 2.0 ports on the right side and rear. In order to connect a USB device follow these steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. USB 2.0 Port Figure 40. Connecting a USB Device DUE TO THE ONGOING CHANGES IN USB TECHNOLOGY AND STANDARDS, NOT ALL USB DEVICES AND/OR DRIVERS ARE GUARANTEED TO WORK. 80 - Device Ports Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. The Anytime USB Charge feature can be disabled and enabled from the BIOS Setup Utility; the feature is enabled by default. The settings for the Anytime USB Charge feature can be changed by going to Start > All Programs > Anytime USB Charge Utility and clicking on Settings. There are three possible settings for this feature: Disable Anytime USB Charge function, Only enable Anytime USB Charge function with AC Adapter, and Enable Anytime USB Charge function with AC Adapter or battery. Note that if the setting is selected, the function will eventually drain the battery if the AC Adapter is not plugged in. Certain USB devices may require that a driver be installed in order for this feature to work. Please check the documentation for your USB device to ensure proper charging with the Anytime USB Charge utility. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones or powered external speakers to your Tablet PC. Your headphones or speakers must be equipped with a 1/8 (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. In order to connect headphones or speakers follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening, then push the connector into the port until it is seated. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external stereo microphone. Your microphone must be equipped with a 1/8(3.5 mm) mini-plug in order to fit into the microphone jack of your Tablet PC. In order to connect a microphone follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening, then push the connector into the port until it is seated. 81 - Device Ports HDMI Port. The High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) port is a digital audio/video interface over which uncompressed streams can be transmitted. HDMI is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as big-

screen TVs and video recorders). To connect an HDMI device:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. External Video Port The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. In order to connect an external video device, follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each end of the connector. Figure 41. Connecting an HDMI Device Figure 42. Connecting an External Video Device PRESSING THE [FN] + [F10] KEYS ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE YOUR SELECTION OF WHERE TO SEND YOUR DISPLAY VIDEO. EACH TIME YOU PRESS THE KEY COMBINATION, YOU WILL STEP TO THE NEXT CHOICE, STARTING WITH THE BUILT-IN DISPLAY PANEL ONLY, MOVING TO THE EXTERNAL MONITOR ONLY, FINALLY MOVING TO BOTH THE BUILT-IN DISPLAY PANEL AND AN EXTERNAL MONITOR. 82 - Device Ports Port Replicator The port replicator extends the functionality of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC by providing ports to connect an external VGA monitor, a LAN (RJ-45) cable, four USB 3.0 devices, a DVI device, a DisplayPort device, headphones, and DC power. The port replicator connects to the bottom of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Docking Connector Power Button Moveable Bar Latch/Unlatch Button USB 3.0 Ports (Qty. 4) DC Power Jack DVI-D Port DisplayPort External VGA Port Security Lock Slot Headphone Jack LAN (RJ-45) Figure 43. Port Replicator - Rear 83 - Port Replicator Port Replicator Components The following is a brief description of the port replicators back panel components. (Figure 43) Power Button The power button allows you to power the port replicator on and off. Docking Connector The docking connector allows you to connect the Port Replicator to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR LIFEBOOK WHEN USING A PORT REPLICATOR, YOU SHOULD TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. DVI-D Port The DVI-D port lets you to connect digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DVI-

D cable. DVI-D is primarily used to connect a computer with a home theater system. DisplayPort The DisplayPort lets you to connect DisplayPort-compatible digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DisplayPort cable. ALTHOUGH DISPLAYPORT AND DVI-D DEVICES ARE SUPPORTED BY THE PORT REPLICATOR, ONLY ONE CAN BE USED AT ANY TIME. AN INTERNAL SWITCH RECOGNIZES WHICH TYPE OF DEVICE IS CONNECTED. IF BOTH ARE CONNECTED AT THE SAME TIME, DISPLAYPORT HAS THE HIGHER PRIORITY. A DISPLAYPORT OR DVI-D DEVICE CAN BE USED CONCURRENTLY WITH AN EXTERNAL VIDEO DEVICE THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE ANALOG EXTERNAL VGA PORT. HOT PLUG IS NOT SUPPORTED BY THE DISPLAYPORT OR DVI-D PORTS. IF A DISPLAYPORT-TO-HDMI CONVERTER IS CONNECTED TO THE DISPLAYPORT, SOUND WILL NOT BE OUTPUT FROM THE HDMI DEVICE. TO USE AN HDMI DEVICE, PLUG IT INTO THE HDMI PORT ON THE SYSTEMS LEFT SIDE. 84 - Port Replicator USB 3.0 Ports (Qty. 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) 3.0 ports allow you to connect USB devices. USB 3.0 ports are backward-compatible with USB 2.0 and 1.1 devices. Moveable Bar Latch/Unlatch Button The moveable bar latch/unlatch button allows you to adjust the moveable bar in order to align your system so that it aligns properly with the port replicator connector. Viewing the port replicator from the front, the moveable bar should be moved as far to the left side of the port replicator as possible. External VGA Port The external VGA port lets you connect an external monitor or projector. Note that if a Port Replicator is attached, you must use the external VGA port on the Port Replicator, not the one on your system. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to listen to stereo sound from your Tablet PC with portable headphones. LAN (RJ-45) Jack The LAN jack allows you to connect a LAN to the Port Replicator. Note that when the system is attached to the Port Replicator, the LAN Jack on the Port Replicator should be used, not the one on the system. Security Lock Slot The security lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. 85 - Port Replicator Attaching the Port Replicator To attach the Port Replicator, align the Port Replicator connector on the bottom of your Tablet PC with the connector on the Port Replicator and push the corners down simultaneously. (Figure 44) Detaching Port Replicator To detach the Port Replicator:

1 Pull the Port Replicators release latch away from the Port Replicator to release it from your Tablet PC.

(Figure 45) 2 Lift the Tablet PC away from the Port Replicator to Docking Connector detach it. (Figure 46) Figure 44. Attaching the Port Replicator Release Latch Figure 45. Unlatching the Port Replicator Figure 46. Removing the System 86 -

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting There may be occasions when you encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices that can be solved by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward issues and identify failures that require service. Identifying the Problem If you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:

1 Turn off your LIFEBOOK notebook. 2 Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your notebook and to an active AC power source. 3 Make sure that any card installed in the PC Card slot is seated properly. You can also remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4 Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5 Turn on your notebook. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it back on. 6 Go through the boot sequence. 7 If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table, that follows, for more detailed troubleshooting information. 87 IF YOU KEEP NOTES ABOUT WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED, YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE MAY BE ABLE TO HELP YOU MORE QUICKLY BY GIVING ADDITIONAL SUGGESTIONS OVER THE PHONE. 8 If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Troubleshooting Table without success, contact your support representative:

Toll free: 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Web site: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your notebook for configuration and serial numbers. 88 - Troubleshooting Specific Problems Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your Tablet PC. Troubleshooting Table ProblemPage ProblemPage Audio Problems . page 90 USB Device Problems. page 92 Optical Drive Problems . page 90 Power Failures . page 93 Port Replicator Problems . page 91 Shutdown and Startup Problems. page 95 Hard Drive Problems . page 91 Video Problems . page 96 Keyboard or Mouse Problems . page 91 Miscellaneous Problems . page 97 Memory Problems . page 92 89 - Troubleshooting Problem Audio Problems There is no sound coming from the built-in speaker. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The volume is turned too low. Adjust the volume control on your Tablet PC and operating system. Use the

[Fn+F9] key combination on your keyboard. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC. The software volume control is set too low. Manually adjusting the volume (i.e., keyboard "hot keys") should dynamically adjust the volume of the operating system (see above). If that doesnt work, adjust the sound volume control settings in your software or application. Headphones are plugged into your Tablet PC. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speakers. Remove the head-

phones. Software driver is not configured correctly. The audio driver may be installed or reinstalled using the Drivers and Applica-

tions CD that came with your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK. Refer to your application and operating system documentation for help. The speakers have been muted using the Volume icon in the system tray. Click the Volume icon in the system tray on the bottom right of the screen. (It looks like a speaker). If the Mute box has a red circle on it, click on it to unselect it. You can also use the [Fn+F3] key combination to toggle the volume on and off. Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the audio mute. Optical Drive Problems LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROMs. The disc is not pushed down onto raised center circle of the drive. Optical drive tray is not latched shut. Open optical drive tray and re-install the disc properly. Push on the front of the optical drive tray until it latches. If that doesnt work, pull out the modular drive latch to remove the device from the bay, then re-

insert the drive until it latched; this ensures that the drive is properly seated. Incorrect DVD Player or player software is installed. Install DVD Player software. DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM is dirty or defective. Wipe the disc with a non-abrasive CD cleaning cloth and reinsert. If it still will not work try another DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM in the drive. 90 - Troubleshooting Problem LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROMs.

(continued) Possible Cause Wrong drive designator was used for the disc in the appli-

cation. Possible Solutions Verify the drive designator used by the application is the same as the one used by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a DVD/CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Note that the drive designation can be changed with the Disk Management tool located at Control Panel ->

Administrative Tools -> Computer Management. The Windows auto insertion function is active and is checking to see if a disc is ready to run. Drive access indicator on the Status Indicator Panel blinks at regular intervals with no disc in the tray or the drive is not installed. Port Replicator Problems Note: Be sure to power down your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC before adding a printer to the Port Replicator parallel port. This is normal. However, you may disable this feature. Tablet PC does not turn on when installed in the optional Port Replicator Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. Port Replicator AC adapter is not plugged in. Tablet PC is not properly seated in the Port Replicator. The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable disc was used to start the Tablet PC. Security is set so your operat-

ing system cannot be started without a password. Provide power to the Port Replicator. Remove and re-dock your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are auto-

matically adjusted. Verify your password and security settings. Keyboard or Mouse Problems The built-in keyboard does not seem to work. The Tablet PC has gone into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. 91 - Troubleshooting Problem You have installed an external keyboard or mouse, and it does not seem to work. Possible Cause Your application has locked out your keyboard. Your external device is not properly installed. Your operating system is not set up with correct software driver for that device. Possible Solutions Try to use your integrated pointing device to restart your system. Re-install your device. See Device Ports on page 79. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Memory Problems Your System screen in the Control Panel does not show the correct amount of installed memory. USB Device Problems Your LIFEBOOK doesnt recognize an installed USB device, or it doesnt work. Your OS is not setup with cor-

rect driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your system has crashed. Try to restart your Tablet PC. Your memory upgrade mod-

ule is not properly installed. Remove and re-install your memory upgrade module. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 75. You have a memory failure. Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. The device is not properly installed. Your device may not have the correct software driver active. The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your system is not aware of its installation. Remove and re-install the device. See Device Ports on page 79. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. Close the application and restart your Tablet PC. 92 - Troubleshooting Problem Power Failures You turn on your LIFE-

BOOK Tablet PC and nothing seems to happen. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The installed battery is com-

pletely discharged or there is no power adapter installed. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. The battery is installed but is faulty. The battery is low. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the presence and condition of the bat-

tery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. If the battery indicates a short, remove it and operate from another power source or replace that battery. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Use a Power adapter to operate until a battery is charged or install a charged battery. The power adapter is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. See Power Sources on page 57. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) has no power from the AC outlet, airplane jack, or car cigarette lighter. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) is faulty. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet. If you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car make sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. Try a different power adapter. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC turns off all by itself. The power management parameters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Options located in the Control Panel to adjust the timeout values to better suit your needs. Install a power adapter, then push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. See Power Sources on page 57. You are operating on battery power and ignored a low bat-

tery alarm until the battery was at the dead battery state and the system has entered Dead Battery Suspend mode. 93 - Troubleshooting Problem Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC turns off all by itself.

(continued) Possible Cause You have a battery failure. Possible Solutions Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel. If the battery is shorted, replace or remove it. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC will not work on battery alone. The installed battery is dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or install a power adapter. Battery is improperly installed. Verify that the battery is properly connected by re-installing it. Your installed battery is faulty. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. The battery seems to discharge too quickly. The power savings features may be disabled. Check the Power Options menu settings and adjust according to your operating needs. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the brightness the more power your display uses. The battery is very old. Replace the battery. You are running an applica-

tion that uses a lot of power due to frequent hard drive access or optical drive access, or use of a Wireless LAN, or Bluetooth device. The battery has been ex-

posed to high temperatures. Use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. Replace the battery. The battery is too hot or too cold. Restore the Tablet PC to normal operating temperature. Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when battery is outside of operating range. 94 - Troubleshooting Possible Cause Problem Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume slide does not work. Suspend/Resume slide is disabled. Possible Solutions To enable the button, go to the Control Panel -> Power Options Properties and click the Advanced tab. In the Power buttons area, select Change what the power button does . There may be application software. conflict Close all applications and try the button again. The system powers up, and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configu-

ration. Set the operating source by pressing the [ESC] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2] key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source set-

tings from the Boot menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup utility and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. Internal hard drive was not detected. Use the BIOS setup utility or Primary Master submenu, located within the Main menu, to try to auto detect the internal hard drive. An error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the Boot sequence. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. See the POST messages to determine the meaning and severity of the prob-

lem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. Your Tablet PC appears to change setup parameters when you start it. BIOS setup changes were not saved when made and you exited the setup utility. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. The BIOS CMOS hold-up bat-

tery has failed. Contact your support representative for repairs. This is not a user serviceable part but has a normal life of 3 to 5 years. Your system display wont turn on when the system is turned on or has resumed. You have installed the LIFE-

BOOK/Security Application panel. Check the Status Indicator Panel for presence of the Security icon. If it is visi-

ble, enter your password See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. 95 - Troubleshooting Problem Video Problems The built-in display is blank when you turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The Tablet PC is set for an external monitor only. Pressing [F10] while holding down the [Fn] key allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order are: built-in display only, external monitor only, both built-in display and external monitor. Display angle and brightness settings are not adequate for your lighting conditions. Move the display and the brightness control until you have adequate visibility. Pressing either the [F6] or [F7] keys while holding down the [Fn] key also allows you to change the brightness level of the display. Power management time-

outs are set for short intervals and you didnt see the display go on and off again. Press a keyboard button or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. (The display may be shut off by Sleep mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The Tablet PC turned on with a series of beeps and the built-in display is blank. Power On Self Test has detected a failurethat doesnt allow the display to operate. Contact your support representative. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. The Tablet PC has gone into Video timeout, Sleep mode, or Save-to-Disk mode because you have not used it for a period of time. Press any keyboard button, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. The power management time-

outs may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. (The display may be shut off by Sleep Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The system may be pass-

word-protected. Check the status indicator panel to verify that the Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your password. Your display wont turn on when the system is turned on or when it has resumed. 96 - Troubleshooting Problem The display does not close. The display has bright or dark spots. The display is dark when on battery power. Possible Cause A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck between the display and keyboard. If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. The Power Management util-

ity default is set on low bright-

ness to conserve power. Possible Solutions Remove all foreign objects from the keyboard. This is normal; do nothing. Display is faulty; contact your support representative. Press [Fn] + [F7] to increase brightness or click the battery gauge, click on More power options, and select Adjust the display brightness. You have connected an external monitor but it does not display anything. Your operating system is not setup with the correct soft-

ware driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your external monitor. Toggle the video destination by pressing [Fn]+ [F10] together, or check your BIOS setup and enable your external monitor. (See the Video Features sub-

menu, located in the Advanced Menu of the BIOS. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. Your external monitor is not properly installed. Your external monitor is not compatible with your LIFE-

BOOK Tablet PC. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. You have connected an external monitor and it does not come on. Miscellaneous Problems Error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the operation of an application. Reinstall your device. See External Video Port on page 82. See your monitor documentation and the External Monitor Support portions of the Specifications section. See Specifications on page 116. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 97 - Troubleshooting Power On Self Test Messages The following is a list of error-and-status messages that the Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check the operating system documentation on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message, contact a support representative.

*Invalid NVRAM Data Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have a display problem. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.

*Keyboard controller error The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.

*Keyboard not detected Keyboard not working. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.

*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted.

*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP Displayed after any recoverable error message. Press [F1] key to Continue or [F2] key to Enter Setup.

*Real time clock error - Check date and time settings Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative.

*Fan error, system shutdown in 30s. Contact Fujitsu tech support Fan error occurred. Please contact your sales representative.

*Fan error occurred during previous boot. Fan error occurred during previous boot. Please contact your sales representative. 98 - Troubleshooting Restoring Your System Image and Software It is very important that you create DVD copies of your Factory Image and Bootable Disc (along with other applicable media such as application discs) before beginning to use your system. To do so, follow the instructions in the Saving Your Factory Image and Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Discs sections of this chapter. Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images Along with instructions on saving your Factory Image, this document outlines several other important procedures, such as making a system image, restoring your Factory Image and system images, managing your images, and restoring the partitions on a hard drive. IN ORDER TO INSTALL APPLICATIONS, MAKE COPIES OF FACTORY AND SYSTEM IMAGES, AND BURN APPLICATION MEDIA AND BOOTABLE DISCS YOU MUST HAVE AN INTERNAL OR EXTERNALLY CONNECTED WRITABLE DVD DRIVE. IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT YOU COPY YOUR FACTORY IMAGE TO REMOVABLE MEDIA (E.G., DVD DISCS). FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN AN INABILITY TO RESTORE THE IMAGE AT A FUTURE DATE. WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU USE DVD-R OR DVD+R DISCS FOR YOUR BACKUP, BUT SUPPORTED MEDIA* FOR IMAGE BACKUPS INCLUDE:

FOR FACTORY IMAGE, APPLICATION DATA, AND BOOTABLE DISC: DVD-R/+R. FOR USER-CREATED BACKUP IMAGE: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.

* DEPENDING UPON YOUR OPTICAL DRIVE AND MEDIA FORMAT USED, SOME MEDIA TYPES MAY BE INCOMPATIBLE FOR CREATING IMAGE BACKUPS. DUE TO CERTAIN LICENSING REQUIREMENTS, SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED SEPARATELY USING THE APPLICATION MEDIA BUNDLED WITH YOUR SYSTEM. Saving your Factory Image When you purchased your new system, a copy of the pre-installed Factory Image was loaded into a hidden partition on your hard disk drive. Having a copy of the original Factory Image available to you means that in the event of system failure, you will be able to restore it to its original state. 99 - Restoring Your System Image and Software To make a copy of the Factory Image to DVD discs, you will need several blank discs (DVD-R or DVD+R discs are recommended) to create the copy. After creating the copy, be sure to label the discs and keep them in a safe place to ensure they do not get damaged. Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Discs SOME CONFIGURATIONS OF CERTAIN LIFEBOOK MODELS DO NOT HAVE APPLICATIONS LOADED ON THE HARD DRIVE; RATHER, THEY ARE AVAILABLE AT THE FUJITSU SUPPORT SITE FOR DOWNLOAD. PLEASE TAKE THAT INTO ACCOUNT WHEN READING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. Using the [Manage/Change] button, you can create backup images of the Factory Image, Application Disc(s), or Bootable Disc. 1 Launch My Recovery from desktop icon 2 Select [Manage/Create]-> [Manage Backup Images]. The Backup Images menu displays a list from which you can choose which type of disc you want to burn: Bootable Disc, Application Discs, or Recovery Disc. 3 Select Recovery Disc, then click [Make DVD]. 4 Confirm that the # box has 2 (Note that in some cases the box may display a larger number for the factory image, depending upon its size.) 5 The message Recovery Disc #1 will be created. Enter your comments and the number of media on the DVD. Click

[YES] to burn the Factory Image. 6 While the copy is being made, a Writing to the media screen displays a progress bar. When the copy is complete, a dialog will appear informing you of the successful completion of the backup. 7 Repeat the process for the remaining images on disc (Bootable Disc and Application Discs). The number of images available may vary depending on your system model; some models do not have the applications loaded on the hard drive. 100 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Recovering Your Factory Image In the event you need to restore your original Factory Image, perform the following steps. Note that there may be some third-party applications that need to be installed from the application media bundled with your system. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. In order to recover your Factory Image, perform the steps outlined in Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk. Backing Up a System Image Optional Step: Launch the Fujitsu Bonus Apps utility from your desktop, and select the components you wish to install. User-Configured System Backups: On your desktop, there is a [MyRecovery] icon that allows you to make backups of your current system image either to another location on your hard drive or on removable media. A system image is the configuration of your C: drive at a particular point of time. You may want to make system image backups occasionally in order to have points to which you can return without having to go all the way back to the Factory Image. By default, system images are saved in the MyRecovery folder (either on D:\ or external hard drive, depending on your hardware type). 1 Click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. The My Recovery screen will appear (See Figure 47). Note that the My Recovery screen illustrated may vary, depending upon your system configuration.) 2 Click the [Backup] button on the MyRecovery screen. 3 On the next screen that appears, you can enter up to 200 characters of information about the backup file. This information will help you to identify the image at a later date. 101 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Figure 47. MyRecovery screen 4 Click the [Next] button and the system will reboot. 5 After rebooting, the Creating of the backup image window appears, in which you can either click [Create the image on D drive] or [Select the drive] if you want to save to an external hard disk drive. (Note that the [Create the image on D drive may not be available on all configurations.) 6 An image appears showing you graphically how the image will be stored. Click the [Next] button. 7 Click [Execute] to start the backup. 102 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Managing Your Backup Images With the MyRecovery tool you can also make copies of backup images, archive them on DVD, or delete them from your hard drive. 1 To begin, click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. 2 Click the [Manage/Create] button in the MyRecovery window. 3 When the MyRecovery Manager window appears, click [Manage Backup Images]. 4 In the next window, a list of your backup images appears. Below the list are three buttons allowing you to [Make DVD], [Copy], or [Delete] your backup images. 5 Select an image title from the list, then click the action button you would like to perform. 6 Note that you need to have an external disk drive connected for the [Copy] button to be enabled. If you elect to copy the image, you will be prompted to enter the destination. If you are ready to copy, click [OK] to proceed. A progress screen appears while the backup copy is being made. 7 Note that if you copy an image to an external hard drive, both the original and the copy will appear in the [Backup Images] window with identical names, dates, and file sizes, but with the different drive letter to distinguish them. Before you select [Make DVD], make sure you have a recordable DVD drive connected and blank DVDs available. Using the Recovery and Utility Tools The Recovery and Utility tools consist of a variety of tools that will help you recover your Factory Image, recover system images, and delete the data from your hard disk. Methods for accessing the utilities Recovery and Utility Tools are preinstalled in a hidden partition by the factory, or they can be accessed by using the bootable disc. Please note that you can delete Recovery and Utility tools from your hard disk drive if you modify the partitions. In this case you will not be able to use the hidden partition for booting to Recovery and Utility Tools, but you will still be able to boot from the Bootable Disc. 103 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Determining whether Recovery and Utility is pre-loaded 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. The Boot Menu will appear. 2 Press the Tab key to select Application menu. 3 Check whether the <Recovery and Utility> option is present. If it is not present, it means that the utility must be used from the disc. Proceed to Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable Disc if <Recovery and Utility> is unavailable. Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. The Boot Menu will appear. 2 Press the Tab key to select Application menu. 3 Cursor down to <Recovery and Utility> and press the [Enter] key. 4 While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, select Use recovery tools..., then click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 The Recovery and Utility screen appears on the screen with three tabs: Diagnostics, Recovery and Utility. Please note that Diagnostics tab is not supported on certain LIFEBOOK/STYLISTIC models when running Recovery and Utility from the hard disk. In order to restore the operating system, please use the middle icon Restoring the Factory Image (only C:\drive) under the Recovery tab. Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable disc To verify/change the boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from the hard drive or an external floppy disk drive), perform the following steps:

1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key to get to the Boot Menu. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option. 3 Insert the bootable disc into the drive tray. 104 - Restoring Your System Image and Software 4 Click [OK]. While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 When the Recovery and Utility screen appears, three tabs will be present: Diagnostics, Recovery, and Utility. Recovery and Utility tabs Diagnostics tab: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. When you select devices from the Diagnosis window then click [Execute], several tests are performed on the selected components. Recovery tab: The Recovery tab contains three tools: Recovering User-Configured System Backups, Restoring the Factory Image (only C: drive), and Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery). You can use these tools to restore the Factory Image from the hidden partition, restore backup image(s) created by you or images stored on DVD discs, and perform a full hard drive recovery. Please refer to instructions above for details on how to create Factory Image Recovery DVDs, user backup DVDs and system image backup. Utility tab: The Utility tab contains three tools: Hard Disk Data Delete, Restore Recovery and Utility, and Windows Complete PC Restore. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions. Restore Recovery and Utility allows you to restore the first hidden partition. Windows Complete PC Restore utility allows you to restore an image created with Windows Backup and Restore Center. Complete PC Restore will overwrite the data on your hard disk drive. 105 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) If you have installed a new hard drive or your hard drive is not bootable, perform the following steps. Note that first you will need to create new partitions on the hard drive, then restore the Factory Image:

1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option. 3 Insert the bootable disc in your DVD drive, then click [OK]. 4 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on <Recovery and Utility>. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 Click the Recovery tab in the Recovery and Utility window, then click Restoring the Factory Image icon. 10 Click [Execute]. 11 Read the precautions, then select I Agree. 12 Click [Next], then click [Execute] to start the recovery process. 13 1. Recovery Disc Check will be in bold and the rest will be grayed out. Follow the instructions and Insert the Recovery Disc #1. In some cases, you may prompted to Insert the Recovery Disc #2, depending upon the size of the Recovery Image 14 Click [Next] to begin the check. Click [Next] again when the check is complete. 15 2. Initializing hard disk drive will be in bold with the message Please insert the Bootable Disc into your optical drive. Insert the bootable disc. Click [Next] to proceed. A dialog box appears, with a checking disc message. 16 Warning All DATA on the Hard Disk will be completely erased!!! will appear. Select [OK]. The partition creation process will begin. 17 3. Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition will be in bold with the message Please insert the Recovery Disk#1 into the optical drive. Click [Next] to proceed. 106 - Restoring Your System Image and Software After completion, the tool will automatically go back to "3.Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition" but will include the note Please insert your Third Party Applications Disc or CyberLink DVD, then click [OK]. After installation of each disc, insert the next and continue until all have been installed. If you don't have your Third Party Applications Disc and/or CyberLink DVD, or you have already inserted these discs, please click [Skip] to continue. NOTE: In some cases (products without an optical drive) you will not have a CyberLink DVD". At this point, you can either:

Insert Application Disc(s) to restore back to hidden partition, or, Click [Skip] to skip restoring Application disc(s) and continue with restore. 18 If you select to insert Application Disc, after copying of application disc(s) to hidden partition is completed, the message will appear again. Repeat inserting application disc(s) until all discs have been copied, then click [Skip]

to continue with Restore. 19 After clicking [Skip], a confirmation message will appear "If you want to skip copying or you have finished copying, click [OK]. Click [Cancel] to go back to Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition. 20 Click [OK] and Restoring Factory Image will begin. 21 When restoration is complete, you will see the message Restoration has been completed. Click [OK] to reboot the computer. Click [OK]. Downloading Driver Updates To ensure that you always have the most current driver updates related to your system, you should occasionally access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility is available from the Fujitsu Support site. FSDM will allow you to view a list of the most current drivers, utilities, and applications to determine whether you have the latest versions. If you have a Windows 7 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site to download the FSDM Utility: http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. 107 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Chapter 5 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC If you use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the Tablet PC and its devices. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC (WHEN USING A PORT REPLICATOR), IT IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO ALWAYS TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY BE HAZARDOUS IF MISUSED. OPERATIONS OF THIS PRODUCT OR SIMILAR PRODUCTS, MUST ALWAYS BE SUPERVISED BY AN ADULT. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF ANY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS AND DO NOT PERMIT THEM TO HANDLE ANY CABLES. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is a durable but sensitive electronic device. Treat it with care. Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case. Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Always follow installation instructions closely. 108 Keep it away from food and beverages. To protect your Tablet PC from damage and to optimize system performance, be sure to keep all air vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the environment in which the system is used. Do not operate the Tablet PC in areas where the air vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion. If you accidentally spill liquid on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:

1 2 3 4 Turn it off. Position it so that the liquid can run out. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. If your Tablet PC will not boot after it has dried out, call your support representative. Do not use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool). Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your Tablet PC. Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards. Do not expose your Tablet PC to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F (60 C) may damage your Tablet PC. Keep the covers closed on the connectors and slots when they are not in use. Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. If you are carrying your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a briefcase, or any other carrying case, make sure that there are no objects in the case pressing on the lid. Never position your Tablet PC such that the optical drive is supporting the weight of the Tablet PC. Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) Clean your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents. Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners. Always shut down the computer, unplug the power adapter, and remove the battery when cleaning or disinfecting the computer exterior, keyboard or LCD display. 109 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Cleaning guidelines using recommended off-the-shelf cleaners Computer exterior, computer keyboard To clean the exterior and keyboard, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:

Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes 3M CL563 Cleaner Wipes Note: After cleaning with one of these products, gently polish with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth until the solution is no longer visible. LCD display To clean the LCD display, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:

Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes Applies to Tablet PC, convertible PC with LCD shield, and standard notebook LCD displays. Wipe the LCD surface gently, allowing it to dry before turning on the computer. Disinfecting LIFEBOOK computers Wipe the surface with a soft cloth wipe and a 50% ethanol solution or use another ethanol-based germicide which has been registered as a hospital disinfectant by the EPA. USE OF INCORRECT CLEANERS CAN RESULT IN OPTICAL IMPAIRMENT OF THE LCD AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE COMPUTER. ALWAYS REFER TO THE CLEANER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR PROPER HANDLING AND USE OF THE PRODUCTS. NEVER USE AMMONIA, ACIDIC, OR ALKALINE CLEANERS OR ORGANIC CHEMICALS SUCH AS PAINT THINNER, ACETONE, PROPYL OR ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL, OR KEROSENE. IT MAY DAMAGE SURFACE FINISHES AND THE COATING OF THE LCD SCREEN. NEVER USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING STYLISTIC AND LIFEBOOK PCS. 110 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Cleaning the dust filter Your LIFEBOOK is equipped with fans to make air flow inside by pulling in outside air to cool the inside of the system. Depending on the environment in which the system is used, dust and dirt may be pulled in along with the air. Accumulated dust and dirt could impair the function of the system. REMOVE AC ADAPTER: BEFORE REMOVING THE FILTER, TURN OFF THE SYSTEM AND PERIPHERALS AND DISCONNECT THE AC ADAPTER. CLEANING THE FILTER:

- DO NOT USE DETERGENT

- AVOID DAMAGING THE FILTER; DAMAGE TO THE FILTER IS NOT COVERED BY WARRANTY.

- USE PLASTIC TOOLS TO CLEAN THE FILTER. METAL OR WOODEN TOOLS COULD DAMAGE THE FILTER. ESD: BEFORE CLEANING THE FILTER, TOUCH A METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY. 1 Turn off your computer and disconnect the AC adapter. 2 Close the display panel and turn the system upside down. 3 Remove the dust filter by pressing the latch towards the filter and lifting it out (Figure 48). 4 Carefully clean the dust filter and the air-cooling duct. 5 Put back the dust filter by inserting the end without latch first and pushing in the filter until it latches. Dust Filter Cover Filter Cover Latch Figure 48. Removing the Dust Filter Cover 111 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC ALWAYS BE SURE THE DUST FILTER IS INSTALLED WHEN RUNNING YOUR SYSTEM. NOT USING THE FILTER COULD CAUSE CONTAMINATION AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM. Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC If storing your Tablet PC for a month or longer, turn it off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium ion batteries. Store the Tablet PC and batteries separately. If you store your tablet with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a bad battery might damage the system. Store your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F

(-25C) and 140F (60C). ALWAYS POWER OFF THE COMPUTER BEFORE TRANSPORTING AND/OR PACKAGING IT. AFTER SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE STATUS LED PANEL INDICATES POWER OFF CONDITION (I.E., NO LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED). IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE UNIT MAY NOT AUTOMATICALLY GO TO POWER OFF OR HIBERNATE MODE WHEN YOU CLOSE THE LID. THIS SITUATION MAY OCCUR DUE TO PRE-OS BOOT PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS OR SOME OTHER APPLICATION RUNNING ON THE COMPUTER. ATTEMPTING TO TRANSPORT THE COMPUTER WHILE POWER IS ON MAY DAMAGE THE TABLET PC DUE TO SHOCK OR OVERHEATING SINCE THE AIR VENTS MAY BE BLOCKED OR RESTRICTED. Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Do not transport your Tablet PC while it is turned on. It is recommended that you carry your Tablet PC with you while traveling, rather than checking it in as baggage. Always bring your System Recovery CD that came with your Tablet PC when you travel. If you experience system software problems while traveling, you may need it to correct any problems. Never put your Tablet PC through a metal detector. Have your Tablet PC hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your Tablet PC through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place your Tablet PC close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have your Tablet PC hand-

inspected by security personnel. Security officials may require you to turn your Tablet PC on, so make sure you have a charged battery on hand. 112 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling overseas. Check the following diagram to determine which plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. Outlet Type Location Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, parts of Latin Amer-

ica, Mexico, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan United Kingdom, Ire-

land, Malaysia, Singa-

pore, parts of Africa Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia China, Australia, New Zealand Batteries Caring for your Batteries Always handle batteries carefully. Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incinerate the battery. Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas. Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten battery life. Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging it. 113 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Increasing Battery Life Power your Tablet PC through the AC or optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible. If your Tablet PC is running on battery power all day, connect it to the AC adapter overnight to recharge the battery. Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable. Set the power management for maximum battery life. Put your Tablet PC in Sleep mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it. Limit your media drive access. Disable the Media Player auto insert notification function. Always use fully charged batteries. Media Care Caring for your Media (DVD/CD/CD-R) Media discs are precision devices and will function reliably if given reasonable care. Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in use. Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface. Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures. Do not bend media discs or set heavy objects on them. Do not spill liquids on media discs. Do not scratch or get dust on media discs. Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen. If a media disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. If a media disc is subjected to a sudden change in temperature, cold to warm condensation may form on the surface. Wipe the moisture off with a clean, soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs. 114 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Caring for your Optical Drive Your optical drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:

The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock or vibration with the power on. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures. Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty. Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be subjected to shock or vibration. Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive. Use of a commercially available lens cleaner is recommended for regular maintenance of your drive. 115 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. Microprocessor New 3rd Generation Intel Core Processor family. (Refer to system label to determine your processor.) Chipset Mobile Intel QM77 Express Platform Control Hub (PCH) Memory System Memory DDR3-1600 MHz SDRAM dual-channel memory module. Two DIMM slots; upgradeable to 16 GB of total memory (8 GB x 2). Cache Memory Up to 4 MB L3 cache on-die (depending upon CPU) 116 Video Built-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LED backlit display with simultaneous display capability. Video Color and Resolution 13.3" HD+ anti-glare display Internal: 1600 x 900 pixel resolution, 16M colors External (CRT, HDMI, DVI): 1920 x 1200 pixel resolution, 16M colors DisplayPort (on port replicator): 2560 x 1600 pixel resolution, 16M colors Simultaneous: 1600 x 900, 16M colors Screen Orientations Supported: 0o, 90o, 180o, 270o Graphics Controller Intel HD 4000 integrated graphics Digitizer touch input) Dual Digitizer, consisting of active digitizer and capacitive touch panel (uses active stylus input and ten finger Audio Realtek codec ALC269 VB6 with High Definition (HD) audio. Headphones: Stereo headphone jack, 3.5 mm, 1 Vrms or less, minimum impedance 32 Ohms Microphone: Stereo microphone jack, 3.5 mm, 100 mVp-p or less, minimum impedance 10K Ohms Two built-in speakers, 20 mm x 12 mm Two built-in digital microphones Mass Storage Device Options Hard Drive Serial ATA II, 3.0Gb/s, 2.5, 9.5 mm or 7 mm, shock-mounted with Shock Sensor utility. Capacity, depth, and speed of the hard drive are determined by system configuration. 32 GB m-SATA SSD cache for fast boot. 117 - Specifications BTO 2.5" 7mmH/9.5mmH SATA HDD 5400rpm: 320, 500GB HDD 7200rpm: 320, 500GB TCG Opal-compliant Self-Encrypted Drive (SED) HDD 7200rpm: 320GB TCG Opal-compliant Self-Encrypted Drive (SED) SSD: 128GB non-FDE SSD(MLC): 128, 256GB Modular Bay Devices One of the following devices is pre-installed:

Modular Blu-ray RW drive Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer Modular Bay Battery Weight Saver Features Integrated Pointing Device Touchpad cursor control buttons Communications Gigabit LAN: Intel wired 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet LAN WLAN: Optional Integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2), or, Atheros XSPAN HB116 802.11abgn Bluetooth: Bluetooth V4+LE device for wireless personal area network communication 118 - Specifications LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Panel See LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons on page 48. Trusted Platform Module The LIFEBOOK T902 has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) installed for added system security. Theft Prevention Lock Lock slots for use with security restraint systems. Web Camera Optional FHD (1920 x 1080 pixel) digital web camera with access indicator LED Device Ports On the LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:

Secure Digital Card slot HDMI Port One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor (see Display specifications) Two USB 2.0 connectors for input/output devices Two USB 3.0 connectors for input/output devices (one of which features Anytime USB Charge support) One DC In connector One LAN (RJ-45) connector Docking port (100-pin, to dock with port replicator) One stereo headphone/line-out jack One stereo microphone/line-in jack Dedicated Smart Card slot (requires third-party application) On the Optional Port Replicator:

One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor Four USB 3.0 connectors for input/output devices One LAN (RJ-45) connector 119 - Specifications One DC-in connector One DVI-D connector One DisplayPort connector One Headphone connector Docking connector (100-pin, to dock with system) Keyboard Built-in keyboard with all functions of 101 key keyboard. Total number of keys: 84 Function keys: F1 through F12, plus Fn extension key Two Windows keys: one Start key, one application key Key pitch: 19 mm; key stroke: 1.7 mm Built-in Touchpad pointing device with left and right buttons Built-in Palm Rest Spill-resistant External USB keyboard/mouse support Optional anti-microbial keyboard Power Batteries Lithium ion battery, rechargeable, 6-cell, 72Wh, or, Optional Lithium ion modular bay battery, rechargeable, 6-cell, 28 Wh AC Adapter Autosensing 100-240V AC, supplying 19V DC, 4.22A, 80W to the LIFEBOOK; includes an AC cable Power Management Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface). 120 - Specifications Dimensions and Weight Overall Dimensions With foot and 6-cell main battery: 13.15"(w) x 9.60"(d) x 1.28 (h) (334 mm x 244 mm x 32.6 mm) Without foot, with 6-cell main battery: 13.15"(w) x 9.60"(d) x 1.06/1.22(h) (334 mm x 244 mm x 26.8/31.0 mm) Weight With weight saver: Approximately 4.69 lbs. (2.13 kg) With optical drive: Approximately 5.05 lbs. (2.29 kg) With bay battery: Approximately 5.31 lbs. (2.41 kg) Environmental Requirements Temperature Operating: 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C). Non-operating: 5 to 140 F (15 to 60 C) Humidity Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing. Non-operating: 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Altitude Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum Popular Accessories For ordering or additional information on Fujitsu accessories please visit our Web site at www.shopfujitsu.com or call 1-800-FUJITSU. 121 - Specifications Pre-Installed Software Depending on your operating system, your Tablet PC comes with pre-installed software for playing audio and video files of various formats. In addition, there is virus protection software and applications that can bring additional value during your daily use of the system. Some software is pre-installed while other apps are a part of Fujitsu Bonus Apps THE FOLLOWING LIST CONSTITUTES THE SOFTWARE THAT MAY BE INSTALLED ON YOUR COMPUTER. THE PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE MAY VARY, AND IS DETERMINED BY YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM AND CONFIGURATION. Adobe Reader Norton Internet Security 2012 (60-day free trial) CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink MakeDisc CyberLink YouCam Google Toolbar Fujitsu Touch Launcher DTS Boost OmniPass Fingerprint application Microsoft Windows Live Essentials Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Edition Learning About Your Software Tutorials All operating systems and most application software have tutorials built into them upon installation. We highly recommend that you step through the tutorial before you use an application. 122 - Specifications Manuals Included with your Tablet PC you will find manuals for your installed operating system and other pre-installed software. Any manuals that are not included are available online through the softwares Help menu. We recommend that you review these manuals for information on the use of these applications. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader allows you to view, navigate, and print PDF files across all major computing platforms. Norton Internet Security 2012 Your system is preinstalled with a free 60-day trial version of Symantecs Norton Internet Security 2012. Internet Security is a suite of tools designed to protect your LIFEBOOK from viruses, hackers, spam, and spyware. It helps you protect data currently on your hard disk from destruction or contamination. The trial version is activated upon your acceptance of software license agreement. After 60 days, you will need to purchase a subscription from Symantec to download latest virus, spyware, and spam definitions. CyberLink MakeDisc CyberLink MakeDisc allows you to burn data, videos and photographs to CDs or DVDs. CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink PowerDVD allows you to produce and edit home movies and slideshows on discs. CyberLink YouCam CyberLink YouCam allows you to capture photos or movies on the embedded webcam, add special effects to them, and share them in a variety of formats or via social networks. CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDirector allows you to edit and enhance your videos, and add special effects to them. Google Toolbar Google Toolbar lets you to search the Internet quickly, block pop-ups, and perform a variety of other tasks to make your Internet experience easier and more pleasant. 123 - Specifications OmniPass Fingerprint application The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass lets you use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords, and presents a convenient user interface through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Fujitsu Touch Launcher The Touch Launcher is a handy on-screen method for quickly launching commonly-used applications and performing Internet tasks. DTS Boost DTS Boost maximizes acoustic power beyond the volume limits of PC hardware, allowing users to create an overall louder or fuller master by limiting the dynamic range and boosting the perceived overall level of the mix. Microsoft Windows Live Essentials Windows Live Essentials is a suite of programs that make it easier and more enjoyable to use your notebook. Live Essentials consists of four Live applications: Messenger, Photo Gallery, Writer, and Mail. Messenger lets you communicate and interact with individuals and groups. Photo Gallery lets you organize, edit, and share your photos. Writer can be used to generate blog entries, upload videos and photos to your blogs, and publish entries online. Mail makes it easy for you to manage your email. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 Edition Office Starter 2010 Edition is a software suite containing basic tools for writing letters and reports, tracking family and friends with address books, managing home finances, and creating a home inventory. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 Edition contains Office Word Starter 2010 for writing, editing, and viewing documents, and Office Excel Starter 2010 for creating and viewing spreadsheets. Office Starter 2010 edition also contains full versions of Office Home & Student 2010, Office Home & Business 2010, and Office Professional 2010. These full-

featured suites can be accessed by purchasing a Product Key Card. Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Edition (32- or 64-bit) 124 - Specifications Glossary AC Adapter A device which converts the AC voltage from a wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your system. Access point Wireless network device used to bridge wireless and wired network traffic. ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Active-Matrix Display A type of technology for making flat-panel displays which has a transistor or similar device for every pixel on the screen. Ad Hoc Mode Ad Hoc Mode refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Points. Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. AGP Accelerated Graphics Port. Graphics port specifically designed for graphics-intensive devices, such as video cards and 3D accelerators. 125 Auto/Airline Adapter A device which converts the DC voltage from an automobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. BIOS Basic Input-Output System. A program and set of default parameters stored in ROM which tests and operates your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when you turn it on until it loads your installed operating system from disk. Information from the BIOS is transferred to the installed operating system to provide it with information on the configuration and status of the hardware. Bit An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0). b/s or bps An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to describe data transfer rates. Boot To start-up a computer and load its operating system from disk, ROM or other storage media into RAM. Bus An electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies inside your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Byte 8 bits of parallel binary information. Cache Memory A block of memory built into the micro-processor which is much faster to access than your system RAM and used in specially structured ways to make your overall data handling time faster. 126 -

CD-ROM Compact disk read only memory. This is a form of digital data storage which is read optically with a laser rather than a magnetic head. A typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB of data and is not subject to heads crashing into the surface and destroying the data when there is a failure nor to wear from reading. Channel Range of narrow-band frequencies used by the WLAN device to transmit data. IEEE802.11b/g - 11 channels, 22 MHz wide channels. CMOS RAM Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random access memory. This is a technology for manufacturing random access memory which requires very low levels of power to operate. Command An instruction which you give your operating system. Example: run a particular application or format a floppy disk. Configuration The combination of hardware and software that makes up your system and how it is allocated for use. CRT Cathode Ray Tube. A display device which uses a beam of electronic particles striking a luminescent screen. It produces a visual image by varying the position and intensity of the beam. Data The information a system stores and processes. DC Direct current. A voltage or current that does not fluctuate periodically with time. Default Value A pre-programmed value to be used if you fail to set your own. 127 -

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used to automatically acquire parameters required for the communication, such as IP address. The sender of IP address is called a DHCP server, and the receiver is called a DHCP client. DIMM Dual-in-line memory module. Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media. Disk Drive The hardware which spins the disk and has the heads and control circuitry for reading and writing the data. DMA Direct Memory Access. Special circuitry for memory to memory transfers of data which do not require CPU action. DMI Desktop Management Interface. A standard that provides PC management applications with a common method of locally or remotely querying and configuring PC computer systems, hardware and software components, and peripherals. DNS Domain Name System. A function to control the association between the IP address and the name assigned to the computer. If you do not know the IP address but if you know the computer name, you can still communicate to that computer. DOS Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk Operating System). 128 -

Driver A computer program which converts application and operating system commands to external devices into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of device in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. ECP Extended Capability Port. A set of standards for high speed data communication and interconnection between electronic devices. Encryption Key (Network Key) Data encryption key used to encrypt message text and for computing message integrity checks. Data encryption protects data from unauthorized viewing. This device uses the same encryption key to encode and decode the data, and the identical encryption key is required between the sender and receiver. ESD Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge of electricity from a static charge which has built-up slowly. Example:

the shock you get from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks you get from brushing hair on a dry day. FCC Federal Communications Commission. GB Gigabyte. One billion bytes. Hard drive A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media where the platter is stiff. I/O Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your Tablet PC in electronic form. 129 -

I/O Port The connector and associated circuits for data entering and leaving your computer in electronic form. IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control interface for a hard drive that is inside the hard drive unit. IEEE802.11a Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11a devices operate in the 5 GHz lower and middle UNII bands. IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 11 Mbps. 802.11b devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. IEEE802.11g Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11g devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. IEEE802.11n Wireless LAN standard using multiple data streams supporting a maximum data rate of 450 Mbps. 802.11n devices operate in both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz UNII bands and are backward compatible with 802.11g and 802.11a. Infrastructure A name of a wireless LAN configuration. This type of communication uses an access point. Another type of communication is called Ad Hoc. IP Address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods. Each number can be zero to 255. For example, 1.160.10.240 could be an IP address. 130 -

Within an isolated network, you can assign IP addresses at random as long as each one is unique. However, connecting a private network to the Internet requires using registered IP addresses (called Internet addresses) to avoid duplicates. The four numbers in an IP address are used in different ways to identify a particular network and a host on that network. Three regional Internet registries -- ARIN, RIPE NCC and APNIC -- assign Internet addresses from the following three classes. Class A - supports 16 million hosts on each of 126 networks Class B - supports 65,000 hosts on each of 16,000 networks Class C - supports 254 hosts on each of 2 million networks The number of unassigned Internet addresses is running out, so a new classless scheme called CIDR is gradually replacing the system based on classes A, B, and C and is tied to adoption of IPv6. IRQ Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hardware signal to the CPU that an external event has occurred which needs to be processed. KB Kilobyte. One thousand bytes. LAN Local Area Network. An interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. LCD Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which makes images by controlling the orientation of crystals in a crystalline liquid. Lithium ion Battery A type of rechargeable battery which has a high power-time life for its size and is not subject to the memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries. 131 -

MAC Address Media Access Control Address. A unique physical address of a network card. For Ethernet, the first three bytes are used as the vendor code, controlled and assigned by IEEE. The remaining three bytes are controlled by each vendor

(preventing overlap), therefore, every Ethernet card is given a unique physical address in the world, being assigned with a different address from other cards. For Ethernet, frames are sent and received based on this address. MB Megabyte. One million bytes. Megahertz 1,000,000 cycles per second. Memory A repository for data and applications which is readily accessible to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs CPU. MHz Megahertz. MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface. A standard communication protocol for exchange of information between computers and sound producers such as synthesizers. Modem A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator. The equipment which connects a computer or other data terminal to a communication line. Monaural A system using one channel to process sound from all sources. 132 -

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The maximum data size that can be transferred at a time through the Internet or other networks. You can set a smaller MTU size to obtain successful communication, if you have difficulty transferring data due to the fact that the maximum size is too large. Network key Data that is used for encrypting data in data communication. The personal computer uses the same network key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore, it is necessary to set the same network key as the other side of communication. Network name (SSID: Service Set Identifier ) When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is performed to avoid interference or data theft. This grouping is performed with Network name (SSID). NTSC National TV Standards Commission. The standard for TV broadcast and reception for the USA. Open system authentication Null authentication method specified in the 802.11 standard that performs no authentication checks on a wireless client before allowing it to associate. Operating System A group of control programs that convert application commands, including driver programs, into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of microprocessor in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. Partition A block of space on a hard drive which is set aside and made to appear to the operating system as if it were a separate disk, and addressed by the operating system accordingly. 133 -

Peripheral Device A piece of equipment which performs a specific function associated with but not integral to a computer. Examples: a printer, a modem, a CD-ROM. Pitch (keyboard) The distance between the centers of the letter keys of a keyboard. Pixel The smallest element of a display, a dot of color on your display screen. The more pixels per area the clearer your image will appear. POST Power On Self Test. A program which is part of the BIOS which checks the configuration and operating condition of your hardware whenever power is applied to your Tablet PC. Status and error messages may be displayed before the operating system is loaded. If the self test detects failures that are so serious that operation cannot continue, the operating system will not be loaded. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. A protocol for Ethernet, using a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), which is used for connection on the phone line. Program Set of coded commands to your computers telling your hardware what to do and how and when to do it. Protocol Procedures and rules use to send and receive data between computers.

- Method of sending and receiving data

- Process used to handle communication errors Conditions required for communication are organized in procedures for correct transfer of information. 134 -

RAM Random Access Memory. A hardware component of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC that holds binary information (both program and data) as long as it has the proper power applied to it. RAM Module A printed circuit card with memory and associated circuitry which allows the user to add additional memory to the computer without special tools. Reset The act of reloading the operating system. A reset erases all information stored in RAM. Resume To proceed after interruption. In your Tablet PC this refers to returning to active operation after having been in one of the suspension states. ROM Read Only Memory. A form of memory in which information is stored by physically altering the material. Data stored in this way cannot be changed by your Tablet PC and does not require power to maintain it. SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory. Shared key authentication 802.11 network authentication method in which the AP sends the client device a challenge text packet that the client must then encrypt with the correct WEP key and return to the AP. If the client has the wrong key or no key, authentication will fail and the client will not be allowed to associate with the AP. Shared key authentication is not considered secure, because a hacker who detects both the clear-text challenge and the same challenge encrypted with a WEP key can decipher the key. 135 -

SSID Service Set Identifier, a 32-character unique identifier attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect to the BSS. The SSID differentiates one WLAN from another, so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. A device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can provide the unique SSID. Because the SSID is broadcast in plain text, it does not supply any security to the network. Status Indicator A display which reports the condition of some portion of your hardware. On your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard. Stereo (audio) A system using two channels to process sound from two different sources. Subnet mask TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists of the subnet address and the address of each computer. Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set among computers communicating with each other. SVGA Super VGA. S-Video Super Video. A component video system for driving a TV or computer monitor. System Clock An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which synchronizes the operation of the system and is counted to provide time of day and date. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A standard Internet protocol that is most widely used. 136 -

TFT Thin Film Transistor A technology for flat display panels which uses a thin film matrix of transistors to control each pixel of the display screen individually. UL Underwriters Laboratories An independent organization that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices. USB Universal Serial Bus. Standard that allows you to simultaneously connect up to 127 USB devices such as game pads, pointing devices, printers, and keyboards to your computer. VRAM Video Random Access Memory. A memory dedicated to video display data and control. WFM Wired for Management is Intels broad-based initiative to reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) of business computing without sacrificing power and flexibility. Wi-Fi Compatible Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity). Identifies that a product has passed an interoperability test supplied by WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), which guarantees the interoperability of wireless IEEE 802.11 LAN products. WLAN Wireless Local Area Network. A wireless interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. 137 -

Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. 138 - Regulatory Information Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:

On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. 139 This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. 140 -

Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 -

5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 141 -

Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing one of the following optional devices:

Integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n) Atheros XSPAN 802.11abgn Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 450 Mbps

(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, and IEEE802.11n CCX4.0. 142 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode

"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 49. Ad Hoc Mode Network 143 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*

Wireless LAN

*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 50. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 144 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). 145 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless Device On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. Wireless Device Switch Figure 51. Wireless Device On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 146 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Configuring the Wireless LAN The optional WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:

Configuring the WLAN 1 Click the Start button, then select Control Panel. (If you are in Windows Vista and the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel.) 2 Double-click the Network and Sharing Center icon. 3 Select Manage wireless networks from the left panel. 4 Click on the [Add] button. 5 Depending upon what type of connection you would like to make, make a selection. For an infrastructure network, select Manually create a network profile. For ad hoc network, select Create an ad hoc network. 6 Enter the required information. If necessary, consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 7 In the event you require assistance, go to the Network and Sharing Center window (Start -> Control Panel ->

Network and Sharing Center), and type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connecting to a Network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:

1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:

147 - Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] ->

Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP or WPA/WPA2 Pre-

Shared key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the [Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off 148 - Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection

(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username/password, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 149 - Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Specification Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**

Number of channels The integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2) and Atheros XSPAN 802.11a/b/g/n WLAN devices conform to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*.

(Automatic switching) 54 Mbps maximum data rate (IEEE802.11n to be determined) 802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n: 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used. 5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, CKIP, WPA 1.0 and WPA 2.0 compliant Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****

* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.

** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.

*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.

**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 150 - WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The Integrated Bluetooth module is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks (PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. SLIDING THE WIRELESS DEVICE SWITCH ON THE FRONT OF THE SYSTEM WILL TURN BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES ON AND OFF AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE BLUETOOTH INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

CLICK ON THE BLUETOOTH ICON IN THE SYSTEM NOTIFICATION AREA LOCATED IN THE LOWER RIGHT CORNER OF THE SCREEN. SELECT TURN ADAPTER OFF. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth The Bluetooth module contains a robust Help users guide to assist you in learning about operation of the Bluetooth device. To access the Help file:

1 Click on the Bluetooth icon in notification area. 2 Select Open Settings. The "Bluetooth Settings" dialog will be opened. 3 Select the Share tab. 4 Click on "Learn more about Bluetooth sharing" link. The Bluetooth User Guide will open. For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at: www.bluetooth.com. 151 - Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 152 - Using the Bluetooth Device Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a fingerprint sensor device at the bottom left below the display screen. Fingerprint Sensor Device With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:

Figure 52. Fingerprint sensor Log onto Windows Cancel a password-protected screen saver Log into homepages that require a username and password After you have enrolled - or registered - your fingerprint, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. 153 The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-

line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. CERTAIN MODELS SUPPORT PRE-BOOT AUTHENTICATION OR PBA. PBA ALLOWS THE USER TO LOG IN PRIOR TO WINDOWS' OWN AUTHENTICATION MECHANISM. A PBA ENVIRONMENT SERVES AS AN EXTENSION OF THE BIOS OR BOOT FIRMWARE AND ALLOWS FOR A MORE SECURE ENVIRONMENT EXTERNAL TO THE OPERATING SYSTEM. Getting Started This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. Installing OmniPass If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 156. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:

The gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen. The Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems (OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:

154 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Windows XP Professional operating system or later At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 156. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. INSTALLATION OF THE APPLICATION REQUIRES THAT YOU HAVE AN EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ATTACHED TO YOUR SYSTEM. FOR INSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER INSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS INSTALLATION. To install OmniPass on your system you must:

1 Omnipass is included in the Fujitsu Bonus Apps. To install Omnipass, start the Fujitsu Bonus Apps application from the desktop icon, select Softex Omnipass and click [Install]. 2 Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. 3 The installation program automatically places an icon (Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. 155 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device To check the version information of OmniPass:

1 From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen), or, Click the Start button and click Control Panel. Double-click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed, or, Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2 Version information is listed on the left side of OmniPass Control center window. Uninstalling OmniPass FOR UNINSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER UNINSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS UNINSTALLATION. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:

1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Control Panel. 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs (In Windows 7: Programs and Features). 3 Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4 Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5 Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. User Enrollment Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept 156 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources, you often have to supply credentials to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of credentials that you have to remember. During user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system (his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password lifebook), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John goes to another computer without he OmniPass account to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and lifebook) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than a system hes enrolled on, he will not gain access. THE ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE ASSUMES YOU HAVE NO HARDWARE AUTHENTICATION DEVICES OR ALTERNATE STORAGE LOCATIONS THAT YOU WISH TO INTEGRATE WITH OMNIPASS. IF YOU DESIRE SUCH FUNCTIONALITY, CONSULT THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT. 157 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Basic Enrollment The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified otherwise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex; click Enroll a new user. 1 Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 2 Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This becomes the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value will be your Windows computer name. In a corporate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. 3 In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. See Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 158 for more information. 4 You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5 Click [OK] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint increases the security of your system and streamlines the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, click the Start button >

Select Programs > Select Softex > Select Enroll a new user. 1 During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. 2 It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process. 158 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elongated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a

[Practice] button; click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. 3 Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the fingerprint, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automatically appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Verification Successful under the capture window. 4 After you finish enrolling and verifying your fingerprints, you have the option to Enable PBA with enrolled finger. If you enable this option, then you must choose two fingers to save in PBA. If you have enrolled successfully, the Finger Enrollment Status in PBA screen will state Finger saved in PBA successfully. IF YOU ENABLE PBA ON YOUR SYSTEM, YOU MUST SET THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD AND PASSWORD ON BOOT SETTINGS. SEE HARD DISK DRIVE PASSWORDS ON PAGE 61 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. Using OmniPass You are ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regularly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. 159 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during password replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unselected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the fingerprint capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or password protected resource that has a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. Go to a site that requires a login (username and password), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter], [Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click the OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but dont click [Login] or [Submit]. Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. 160 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. THIS SETTING IS MORE CONVENIENT IN THAT WHENEVER YOU GO TO A SITE REMEMBERED WITH THIS SETTING, YOU WILL BYPASS ANY AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE AND GAIN INSTANT ACCESS TO THE SITE. BUT SHOULD YOU LEAVE YOUR SYSTEM UNATTENDED WITH YOUR OMNIPASS USER LOGGED IN, ANYONE USING YOUR SYSTEM CAN BROWSE TO YOUR PASSWORD PROTECTED SITES AND GAIN AUTOMATIC ACCESS. If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. Click Finish to complete the remember password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Password Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. 161 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master password prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. IF A MACHINE IS LOCKED AND OMNIPASS DETECTS A DIFFERENT USER LOGGING BACK IN WITH A FINGERPRINT, THE FIRST USER WILL BE LOGGED OUT AND THE SECOND USER LOGGED IN. Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Passwords under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. You can view credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. 162 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device The exception to the above rule is when resetting the Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm the password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt and click OK. Your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management;

OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then [Apply]. WHEN YOU DELETE AN IDENTITY, ALL OF ITS ASSOCIATED REMEMBERED SITES AND PASSWORD PROTECTED DIALOGS ARE LOST. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click [Apply] to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automatically be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using

"master password". Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your username in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password: field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity to login as, then click OK. 163 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Identity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-

down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing passwords for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 162. Configuring OmniPass This section gives an overview of both the Export/Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users YOU CANNOT IMPORT A USER INTO OMNIPASS IF THERE ALREADY IS A USER WITH THE SAME NAME ENROLLED IN OMNIPASS. Using OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported. YOU SHOULD PERIODICALLY EXPORT YOUR USER PROFILE AND STORE IT IN A SAFE PLACE. IF ANYTHING HAPPENS TO YOUR SYSTEM, YOU CAN IMPORT YOUR OMNIPASS PROFILE TO A NEW SYSTEM AND HAVE ALL YOUR REMEMBERED SETTINGS AND FINGERPRINTS INSTANTLY. YOU DON'T FORGET THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS WHEN EXPORTING. WHEN YOU EXAMINE THE IMPORTATION, YOU ARE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICATION. THE CREDENTIALS THAT WILL ALLOW A USER PROFILE TO BE IMPORTED ARE THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS OF THE EXPORTED USER. THEY ARE THE CREDENTIALS THAT HAD TO BE SUBMITTED WHEN THE USER PROFILE WAS EXPORTED. YOU WILL NEED USER NAME, PASSWORD, AND DOMAIN. 164 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open OmniPass Control Center, and click Run User Management Wizard. Click Backup a user's OmniPass profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authentication, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. Importing an OmniPass User Profile To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Run User Management Wizard. Click Restore a user's OmniPass profile. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported

(.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login credentials must be created on the machine importing the profile. Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new system. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sunshine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, provided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. 165 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail. OmniPass Control Center The Omnipass Control Center allows you to perform a variety of Omnipass "housekeeping" tasks. For details about the features offered by the Control Center:

1 Go to Start > All Programs > Softex > Omnipass Control Center. 2 When the Omnipass Control Center opens, click the Help link on the left side of the Control Center window. Troubleshooting You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access: Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authenticate as Themselves. Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the procedure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank passwords to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. 166 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied

(username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:

Your Windows password has changed Your Windows account has been disabled If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 167 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Appendix C: Using Intel Wireless Display Using the Wireless Display technology Intel Wireless Display (WiDi) is a new technology that is available as an option on selected Fujitsu LIFEBOOK computers. If you have Intel WiDi on your system, please read these instructions and information regarding its use. Intel WiDi lets users enjoy and share PC content from an Intel Core processor-based notebook with their big screen TV. With Intel WiDi, you can use your big screen TV to view data and applications from your hard drive, home network, or the Internet. Its no longer necessary for friends and families to crowd around the PC to enjoy content stored or accessed there. As its name implies, Intel WiDi is a wireless technology. Note, however, that it requires a third-party display adapter in order to be used. The display adapter is attached to the TV via HDMI (preferred) or composite A/V cables. FIRST GENERATION DISPLAY ADAPTERS ARE AVAILABLE FROM ELECTRONICS RETAILERS. ANY DISPLAY ADAPTER THAT IS COMPATIBLE WITH INTEL WIRELESS DISPLAY CAN BE USED WITH THIS TECHNOLOGY. IF YOUR TELEVISION HAS HDMI PORTS, THAT IS THE PREFERRED METHOD OF CONNECTION AS OPPOSED TO COMPOSITE CABLE CONNECTION. 168 IF YOU PURCHASED A SYSTEM WITH AN INTEL WIRELESS LAN AND OPTIONAL INTEL WIDI TECHNOLOGY, THE WIDI APPLICATION MAY OR MAY NOT BE PRE-INSTALLED (DEPENDING UPOON YOUR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION). SYSTEMS WITH INTEL WIDI PRE-INSTALLED WILL HAVE A WIDI ICON LOCATED ON THEIR DESKTOP. IF THE ICON IS NOT PRESENT, INTEL WIDI WILL BE INSTALLED AS SOON AS YOU RUN CLICKME. THE INTEL WIDI TECHNOLOGY WILL ONLY WORK IN COMBINATION WITH AN INTEL WIRELESS LAN. ONLY WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER CAN BE USED AS THE MEIA PLAYER FOR WIDI 2.0. BEFORE USING INTEL WIDI, BE SURE THAT THE SYSTEMS WIRELESS DEVICE SWITCH IS TURNED ON. NOTE THAT SECURE CONTENTS ARE NOT SUPPORTED BY INTEL WIDI 2.0. CONTENT REQUIRING OUTPUT PROTECTION SUCH AS BLU-RAY AND DVD MOVIE PLAYBACK IS NOT SUPPORTED BY WIDI. THERE MAY BE A SLIGHT TIME LAG WHEN USING WIDI WHEN YOU MOVE THE MOUSE OR TYPE IN CHARACTERS. THE FIRST TIME YOU USE WIDI, THE DEFAULT DISPLAY RESOLUTION IS 1280X720. IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO CHANGE THE RESOLUTION, GO TO THE CONTROL PANEL -> DISPLAY PROPERTIES UNDER THE SETTINGS TAB. ONCE YOU HAVE SET THE RESOLUTION, IT WILL BECOME THE DEFAULT UNLESS YOU CHANGE IT AGAIN. Starting the WiDi application To launch Intel Wireless Display, perform the following steps:

1 Verify that you have a display adapter connected to the television on which you want to use WiDi and turn on the television. 2 If you havent yet turned on the wireless device switch on your notebook, do so now. 3 Click on the WiDi icon on your desktop or the Start menu shortcut. 4 The PC content is displayed on the big screen TV. After the initial set-up between the laptop and a compatible display adapter, you can set the adapter as the default to auto-connect. In the future, simply opening the application will automatically connect the two. For detailed information about using and troubleshooting the WiDi technology, click on the WiDi icon then click the

[Help] button in the upper right-hand corner to open the Wireless Display Help file. 169 - Using the Wireless Display technology Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Index A About This Guide 1, 8 AC adapter 57 plug adapters 113 Active Digitizer 38 Air Vents 23 Anti-theft lock slot 21 Auto/Airline Adapter 57, 58 B Battery 68 care 113 cold-swapping 71 conserving power 64 dead 94 faulty 94 hot-swapping 71 increasing life 114 level indicator 25 level indicators 25 lithium ion battery 68 low 70 problems 94 recharging 69 replacing 71 shorted 70 Standby mode 70 170 Battery Latches 23 BIOS Guide 61 setup utility 61 Bluetooth 151 Built-in Speakers 90 Button Icons 49 C Capacitive Touchscreen 42 CapsLock 26 CD-ROM 90, 91 Cold-swapping 47 Configuration Label 116 Contact Information 9 Controls and Connectors 12 Conventions Used in the Guide 8 Cursor Keys 33 D DC Output Cable 57 DC Power Jack 57 Device Ports 79 DIMM 75 Display Panel 15, 27 brightness 30 opening 27 problems 96 Docking Port 79 Double-Clicking 36 Dragging 36, 37 Dual Built-in Microphones 17 DVD drive 90, 91 E Error Messages 98 External Video Port 13, 82 F Fingerprint Sensor Device 17, 153 enrolling a fingerprint 158 getting started 154 installing OmniPass 154 logging into a remembered site 161 OmniPass authentication toolbar 160 password replacement 159 remembering a password 160 uninstalling OmniPass 156 user enrollment 156 using OmniPass 159 Fujitsu Contact Information 9 Fujitsu LifeBook storing 111 traveling 112 Function Key F10 34 F3 34 F4 34 F6 34 F7 34 F8 34, 45 F9 34, 45 FN 34 G Gestures 42 Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack 21 Glossary 125 H Hard Disk Drive access indicator 26 problems 91 HDMI Port 17 Headphone Jack 12, 18, 81 Hibernation Feature 65 disable/enable 65 I IEEE 1394 Port 19, 81, 82 Internal LAN Jack 79 K Keyboard 16, 32 cursor keys 33 function keys 33 numeric keypad 32 problems 91 windows keys 33 L LifeBook Security Panel 15, 48 operating 54 passwords 52 setting up 52 uninstalling 55 Local Area Network (LAN) 13 171 M Memory capacity 77 checking capacity 77 compartment 22, 75 installing 75 problems 92 removing 77 upgrade module 75 Microphone Jack 12, 19, 81 Modular Bay 46 cold-swapping 47 devices 46 installing 46 removing 46 Mouse problems 91 N NumLk 26 P Pen tether 44 Pen Tether Attachment Point 19 Pointing Device 35 Port Replicator 84 attaching 86 back panel components 84 connector 23 detaching 86 problems 91 Post-logon button functions 50 Power AC adapter 57 Auto/Airline adapter 57 failure 93 indicator 24 management 64 off 66 on 59 problems 95 sources 57 Power Management 64 Power On Self Test 60, 98 Power/Suspend/Resume Slide 15, 64 Pre-Installed Software 122 Q Quick Point Pointing Device 35 R Registration 63 Regulatory Information 138 Restarting 66 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 99 Right Button 17 RJ-45 79 S ScrLk 26 SD Card Slot 12 SDRAM 22, 75 Secure Digital Cards 73 Security Buttons 48 Security lock slot 12 Smart Card Slot 12 172 Specifications 116 Audio 117 Chipset 116 Device Ports 119 Dimensions and Weight 121 Environmental Requirements 121 Keyboard 120 mass storage device options 117 Memory 116 Microprocessor 116 Power 120 Video 117 Status Indicator Panel 15, 24 Suspend/ Resume button 13 T Tablet Configuration 28 Touch Screen calibrating 41 clicking 40 dragging 41 Touchpad Control Adjustment 37 Troubleshooting 87 U USB Ports 12, 18, 21, 80, 92 V Volume control 45 W Warranty 10 Web Cam Access LED 15 Windows keys 33 Application key 33 Start keys 33 Windows Power Management 65 Wireless Device On/Off Switch 13 Wireless LAN Before Using the Wireless LAN 142 configuring 142 connection to the network 147 deactivating/disconnecting 145 modes 143 Specifications 150 Troubleshooting 148 173

Operating manual System LIFEBOOK T732 Congratulations on your purchase of an innovative product from Fujitsu. The latest information about our products, tips, updates etc. can be found on the Internet at: "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/"

For automatic driver updates, go to: "http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/download"

Should you have any technical questions, please contact:

our Hotline/Service Desk (see the Service Desk list or visit:

"http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/contact/servicedesk") Your sales partner Your sales ofce We hope you enjoy working with your new Fujitsu system!

Published by Fujitsu Technology Solutions Mies-van-der-Rohe-Strae 8 (Mies-van-der-Rohe Street No. 8) 80807 Munich, Germany Contact http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/

Copyright Fujitsu Technology Solutions 2012. All rights reserved. Publication Date 10/12 Order No.: A26391-K368-Z320-1-7619, edition 1 LIFEBOOK T732 Operating manual Innovative technology Ports and controls Important notes First-time setup of your device Working with the notebook Security functions Connecting external devices Removing and installing components during servicing Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Troubleshooting and tips Technical data Manufacturers notes Index 7 9 12 15 18 68 75 82 90 92 99 102 108 Remarks Information on the product description meets the design specications of Fujitsu and is provided for comparison purposes. Several factors may cause the actual results to differ. Technical data is subject to change without prior notication. Fujitsu rejects any responsibility with regard to technical or editorial mistakes or omissions. Trademarks Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Made under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS and the symbol are registered trademarks and

& DTS Boost is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product contains software. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks specied here are the property of their respective owners. Copyright No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced or translated without the prior written consent of Fujitsu. No part of this publication may be saved or transferred by any electronic means without the written approval of Fujitsu. Contents Contents 7 Innovative technology . 7 Further information . 8 Notational conventions . Ports and controls . 9 Important notes . 12 Safety notes . 12 Additional safety notes for devices with radio components . 12 Energy saving . 13 Energy saving under Windows . 13 Travelling with your notebook . 13 Before you travel

. 13 Notebook: transporting . 14 Cleaning the notebook . 14 First-time setup of your device . 15 Unpacking and checking the device . 15 Selecting a location . 16 Mains adapter connecting . 16 Switching on the device for the rst time . 17 Working with the notebook . 18 Status indicators . 18 Opening the notebook . 20 Switching on the notebook . 21 Programming the ON/OFF switch . 21 Different ways to use your notebook . 22 From notebook to Tablet PC . 22 Select display orientation (portrait or landscape orientation) . 24 From Tablet PC to notebook . 25 Switching off the notebook . 26 Closing the notebook . 27 Handwriting recognition under Windows 7 . 27 LCD screen . 28 Ambient Light Sensor . 28 Using a device as a tablet PC . 28 Using ngers . 29 Using the stylus pen . 32 Using the device as a notebook . 35 Touchpad and touchpad buttons . 35 Keyboard . 37 Virtual numeric keypad . 39 Country and keyboard settings . 39 Key combinations . 40 Tablet buttons . 42 Programming the tablet buttons . 43 Webcam . 44 Rechargeable battery . 45 Charging, caring for and maintaining the battery . 45 Removing and installing the battery . 46 Battery charge status indicator

. 48 Fujitsu 3 Contents Module . 49 Removing a module . 49 Installing a module . 50 Optical drive . 50 Handling data carriers . 50

. 51 CD/DVD indicator

. 51 Inserting or removing a data carrier

. 52 Manual removal (emergency removal) Removing and tting the dust removal cover (ventilation slot cover)

. 52 Using the power-management features . 54 Memory cards . 55 Supported format . 55 Inserting the memory card . 55 Removing the memory card . 56 ExpressCards . 56 Inserting the card . 57 Removing the card . 58 Loudspeakers and microphones . 58 SIM card . 59 Inserting the SIM card . 59 Removing the SIM card . 59 Optional Wireless LAN / Bluetooth / UMTS / LTE wireless components . 60 Switching the wireless components on and off

. 60 Setting up WLAN access . 61 Access via UMTS / LTE . 61 UMTS/LTE antenna . 61 Ethernet and LAN . 62

. 62 Your Port Replicator (optional)

. 63 Ports on the Port Replicator Setting up the port replicator

. 64 Connect the notebook to the port replicator . 64 Switching on the notebook via the port replicator . 66 Switching off notebook via Port Replicator . 66 Disconnecting the notebook from the port replicator

. 67 Security functions . 68 Brief overview of security functions . 68 Conguring the ngerprint sensor

. 69 Using the Security Lock . 69 Conguring password protection in BIOS Setup Utility . 70 Protecting BIOS Setup Utility (supervisor and user password) . 70 Password protection for booting of the operating system . 71 Password protection for the hard disk . 72 Using the security function of the tablet keys . 73 Setting the Supervisor password . 73 Setting the User password . 73 Entering passwords using the tablet buttons . 73

. 74 Enabling TPM . 74 Disabling TPM . 74 Connecting external devices . 75

. 76 Connecting an external monitor

. 77 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (device-dependent) Connecting an external monitor to the DisplayPort 4 Fujitsu Contents HDMI port

. 78 Connecting USB devices . 79 USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge) . 80 How to remove USB devices correctly . 80 Connecting external audio devices . 81 Microphone port/Line In . 81 Headphone port

. 81 Removing and installing components during servicing . 82 Notes on installing and removing boards and components . 82 Preparing to remove components . 83 Installing and removing memory expansion . 83 Removing a cover . 84 Removing memory modules . 84 Installing a memory module . 85 Attaching the cover . 85 Removing and installing the hard disk . 86 Removing a cover . 86 Removing a hard disk . 87 Installing a hard disk . 88 Attaching the cover . 89 Finishing component removal

. 89 Settings in BIOS Setup Utility . 90 Starting the BIOS Setup Utility . 90 Operating BIOS Setup Utility . 90 Exiting BIOS Setup Utility . 91 Exit Saving Changes - save changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility

. 91 Exit Discarding Changes Discard changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility . 91 Load Setup Defaults Copy Standard Entries . 91 Discard Changes Discard changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility . 91 Save Changes - save changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility . 91

. 91 Save Changes and Power Off Troubleshooting and tips . 92 Help if problems occur . 92 The notebooks date or time is incorrect . 93 Battery indicator does not illuminate . 93 When certain characters are entered on the keyboard, only numerals are written . 93 The notebooks LCD screen remains blank . 93 The LCD screen is difcult to read . 94 The external monitor remains blank . 94 The external monitor is blank or the image is unstable . 94 The cursor does not correctly follow the pen movements . 95 Pen input not working . 95 The notebook cannot be started . 95 The notebook stops working . 96 The printer does not print

. 96 The radio connection to a network does not work . 96 The battery discharges too quickly . 97 Acoustic warnings . 97 Error messages on the screen . 97 Technical data . 99 Fujitsu 5 Contents Notebook . 99 Port Replicator (optional)

. 100 Rechargeable battery . 101 Mains adapter for use with the notebook and port replicator

. 101 Manufacturers notes . 102 Disposal and recycling . 102 Declarations of Conformity . 102 CE marking . 102 Regulatory notices . 102 Regulatory information for notebooks without radio device . 103 DOC (Industry CANADA) notices . 104 FCC regulatory information for notebooks with radio device . 106 Index . 108 6 Fujitsu Innovative technology Innovative technology

... and ergonomic design make your device a reliable and convenient companion. The device boots very quickly, is ready for immediate use and offers a particularly long operating time because of its high capacity battery. With the user-friendly "BIOS Setup Utility" you can control your notebooks hardware and better protect your system against unauthorised access by using the powerful password properties. Information on the connections and user components of your notebook can be found in" Ports and controls", Page 9. Further information The Windows drivers for your device can be found on our Internet site. The factory installation of your device does not support any other operating system. Fujitsu Technology Solutions accepts no liability whatsoever if any other operating system is used. Software oriented components of these instructions refer to Microsoft products, if they come within the scope of the delivery. If you install other software products, pay attention to the operating instructions of the manufacturer. Fujitsu 7 Innovative technology Notational conventions

This font This font This font

"This font"

Pay particular attention to text marked with this symbol. Failure to observe these warnings could pose a risk to health, damage the device or lead to loss of data. The warranty will be invalidated if the device becomes defective through failure to observe these warnings. Indicates important information for the proper use of the device. Indicates an activity that must be performed Indicates a result indicates data entered using the keyboard in a program dialogue or at the command line, e.g. your password (Name123) or a command used to start a program (start.exe) indicates information that is displayed on the screen by a program, e.g.:

Installation is complete. indicates indicates terms and texts used in a software interface, e.g.: Click on Save names of programs or les, e.g. Windows or setup.exe. cross-references to another section, e.g. "Safety information"

cross-references to an external source, e.g. a web address: For more information, go to "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/"

Names of CDs, DVDs and titles or designations for other materials, e.g.: "CD/DVD Drivers & Utilities" or "Safety/Regulations" manual Key This font indicates a key on the keyboard, e.g: F10 indicates terms and texts that are emphasised or highlighted, e.g.: Do not switch off the device 8 Fujitsu Ports and controls Ports and controls This chapter presents the individual hardware components of your device. It gives you an overview of the devices indicators and connections. Please familiarise yourself with these components before you start to work with the device. Notebook open 1 2 3 5 6 11 4 12 13 14 6 18 17 16 15 14 7 8 9 10 5 1 = LCD screen 2 = WebCam (* optional) 3 = WebCam LED 4 = Fingerprint sensor 5 = Microphone 6 = Status indicators 7 = Windows button 8 = Tablet buttons 9 = ON/OFF switch 10 = Ambient light sensor 11 = Keyboard 12 = Touchpad 13 = Touchpad buttons 14 = Loudspeakers 15 = Microphone jack 16 = Headphone port 17 = Memory card slot 18 = ON/OFF switch for wireless components Fujitsu 9 Ports and controls Left panel 1 2 3 1 = DC input connector (DC IN) 2 = HDMI port Rear 3 = USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge, USB 3.0) 1 2 3 4 1 = Security Lock device 2 = VGA monitor port 3 = USB ports (USB 2.0) 4 = LAN port 10 Fujitsu Right-hand side Ports and controls 1 2 3 4 1 = Pen slot 2 = ExpressCard slot Bottom 3 = Module bay with optical drive 4 = Eject lever for module bay 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 1 = Hard disk service compartment 2 = Memory service compartment 3 = Attachment eye for the pen cord 4 = Battery with SIM card slot under the battery 5 = Battery charge status indicator 6 = Port for port replicator 7 = Ventilation slot cover Fujitsu 11 Important notes Important notes Importantnotes Notes This chapter contains essential safety information which must be followed when working with your notebook. Other notes also provide useful information which will help you with your notebook. Safety notes Safetynotes Notes Please follow the safety notes provided in the "Safety/Regulations" manual as well as the safety notes given below. Please pay special attention to the sections in the manual marked with the symbol on the left. When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant notes in this operating manual. Read the information on the ambient conditions in the "Technical data", Page 99 and "First-time setup of your device", Page 15 before preparing your notebook for use and switching it on for the rst time. When cleaning the device, please observe the relevant notes in the section "Cleaning the notebook", Page 14. Pay attention to the additional safety notes for devices with radio components provided in the "Safety/Regulations" manual. Please refer to the notes in the chapter "Removing and installing components during servicing", Page 82. This notebook complies with the relevant safety regulations for data processing equipment. If you have questions about using your notebook in a particular area, please contact your sales outlet or our Hotline/Service Desk. Radiocomponent:

WirelessLAN:

Bluetooth,safetynotes Additional safety notes for devices with radio components If a radio component (Wireless LAN, Bluetooth, UMTS/LTE) is incorporated in your notebook, you must be sure to observe the following safety notes when using your notebook:

Switch off the radio components when you are in an aircraft or driving in a car. Switch off the radio components when you are in a hospital, an operating room or near a medical electronics system. The transmitted radio waves can impair the operation of medical devices. Switch off the radio components when you let the device get near ammable gases or into hazardous environments (e.g. petrol station, paintshops), as the transmitted radio waves can cause an explosion or a re. For information on how to switch radio components on and off, see chapter

"Switching the wireless components on and off", Page 60. 12 Fujitsu Important notes Notes Energy Energy saving EnergysavingSwitch the notebook off when it is not in use. Switch off external, connected devices if you are not using them. If you use the energy saving functions, the notebook uses less energy. You will then be able to work for longer before having to recharge the battery. Energy efciency is increased and the environmental impact is reduced. You save money while protecting the environment. Energy saving under Windows Make use of the power management features (see ""Using the power-management features", Page 54"). Travelling with your notebook NotebookPlease observe the points listed below when travelling with your notebook. Mobileoperation Notes Transportation Before you travel Back up important data stored on your hard disk. Switch off the radio component for data security reasons. With data trafc via a wireless Notebook Travel,notebook connection, it is also possible for unauthorised third parties to receive data. Information on activating data encryption is provided in the documentation for your radio component. If you wish to use your notebook during a ight, rst check with the ight attendants if it is OK to do so. When travelling in other countries If you are travelling abroad, check that the mains adapter can be operated with the local mains voltage. If this is not the case, obtain the appropriate mains adapter for your notebook. Do not use any other voltage converter!

Check whether the local mains voltage and the power cable are compatible. If this is not the case, buy a power cable that matches the local conditions. Enquire with the corresponding government ofce of the country you will be travelling in as to whether you may operate the radio component integrated in your notebook there (see also "CE marking", Page 102). Fujitsu 13 Important notes Notebook:

transporting Protect the notebook from severe shocks and extreme temperatures

(e.g. direct sunlight in a car). Transportation If your device has an optical drive, remove all data media (e.g. CD, DVD) from the drives. Notebook Switch the notebook off. Unplug the mains adapter and all external devices from the power socket. Disconnect the mains adapter cable and the data cables for all external devices. Close the LCD screen. To protect against damaging jolts and bumps, use a notebook carrying case to transport your notebook. Cleaning the notebook Do not clean any interior parts yourself; leave this job to a service technician. Only use cleaning products designed for computers. Normal household cleaners and polishes can damage the markings on the keyboard and the device, the paintwork or the notebook itself. Ensure that no liquid enters the notebook. The LCD screen very sensitive to scratches. Only clean the display surface with a very soft, slightly damp cloth. Cleaning Notes Notebook Keyboard Touchpad LCDscreen Switch the notebook off. CrystalViewdisplay In order to prevent accidentially switching the device on, remove the power cable from the mains adaptor and remove the battery (see "Removing and installing the battery", Page 46).

The surface can be cleaned with a dry cloth. If particularly dirty, use a cloth which has been moistened in mild domestic detergent and then carefully wrung out. To clean the keyboard and the touchpad, if available, you can use disinfectant wipes. Ensure that no liquid enters the device. 14 Fujitsu First-time setup of your device First-time setup of your device First-timesetup Gettingstarted Please read the chapter "Important notes", Page 12. If your device is equipped with a Windows operating system, the necessary hardware drivers and supplied software are already pre-installed. Before you switch on the device for the rst time, connect it to the mains voltage using the mains adapter, see "Mains adapter connecting", Page 16. The mains adapter must be connected during the entire installation process. A system test is performed when your device is rst switched on. Various messages can appear. The display may remain dark for a short time or may icker. Please follow the instructions on the screen. NEVER switch off your device during the rst-time setup process. On delivery, the battery can be found in the battery compartment or in the accessories kit. The battery must be charged if you want to operate your device using the battery. When used on the move, the built-in battery provides the device with the necessary power. You can increase the operating time by using the available energy-saving functions. For instructions on how to connect external devices (e.g. mouse, printer) to your device, please refer to the operating manual for your device. Unpacking and checking the device Should you discover any damage that occurred during transportation, notify your local sales outlet immediately!

Unpack all the individual parts. Transport Check your device for any visible damage which may have occurred during transportation. Packaging You may need the packaging in the future, if you need to transport your device. Fujitsu 15 First-time setup of your device Selecting a location Selectingalocation Device Mainsadapter Select a suitable location for the device before setting it up. Follow the instructions below when doing so:

Never place the device or the mains adapter on a heat-sensitive surface. The surface could be damaged as a result. Never place the device on a soft surface (e.g. carpeting, upholstered furniture, bed). This can block the air vents and cause overheating and damage. The underside of the device heats up during normal operation. Prolonged contact with the skin may become unpleasant or even result in burns. Place the device on a stable, at, non-slippery surface. Please note that the rubber feet of the device may mark certain types of delicate surfaces. Keep other objects at least 100 mm away from the device and its mains adapter to ensure adequate ventilation. Never cover the ventilation slots of the device. Do not expose the device to extreme environmental conditions. Protect the device from dust, humidity, and heat. Mains adapter connecting Preparingforoperation Mainsadapter Observe the safety notes in the enclosed "Safety/Regulations" manual. The supplied power cable conforms to the requirements of the country in which you purchased your device. Make sure that the power cable is approved for use in the country in which you intend to use it. Connect the power cable (1) to the mains adapter. Plug the mains cable (2) into a mains outlet. Connect the mains adapter cable (3) to the DC jack (DC IN) of the device. 3 1 2 16 Fujitsu First-time setup of your device Switching on the device for the rst time Switchingonforthersttime On devices with ON/OFF switch for wireless components: Slide the ON/OFF switch for wireless components to the ON position before switching on the device. When you switch on the device for the rst time, the supplied software is installed and congured. Because this procedure must not be interrupted, you should set aside enough time for it to be fully completed and connect the device to the mains using the mains adapter. During the installation process, DO NOT restart the device unless you are requested to do so!

To make it easier to use your device for the rst time, the operating system is pre-installed on the hard disk. 1 Slide the ON/OFF switch (1) to the right to switch on the notebook.

The ON/OFF switch returns automatically to its original position. During installation, follow the instructions on screen. If a Windows operating system is installed on your device, you will nd more information on the system and drivers, help programmes, updates, manuals etc. on the device or on the Internet under "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/". Fujitsu 17 Working with the notebook Working with the notebook Notebook,operation NotebookThis chapter describes the basics for operating your notebook. Please read the chapter entitled "Connecting external devices", Page 75 for instructions on how to connect devices such as a mouse and a printer to the notebook. Please refer to the notes in "Important notes", Page 12. Status indicators The status indicators provide information about the status of the power supply, the drives and the keyboard functions etc. Statusindicators Symbols 18 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Status displays Description Power-on indicator Indicator is illuminated: The notebook is switched on. Indicator ashes: The notebook is in sleep mode (Save-to-RAM). The indicator is not illuminated: The notebook is switched off or in Save-to-Disk mode. Battery charging indicator The battery charging indicator shows whether a battery is installed and being charged. Battery indicator This description applies for both batteries. The battery indicator shows the state of charge of the installed battery. The indicator is lit green: The battery is between 51 % and 100 %

charged. The indicator is lit orange: The battery is between 13 % and 50 %

charged. The indicator is lit red: The battery is between 0 % and 12 % charged. The indicator ashes orange: The battery state of charge is being checked (for four seconds after battery installation). The indicator ashes red: The battery is faulty. The indicator is not lit: There is no battery installed. Note: if you use batteries with a capacity of 5800 mAh or 6200 mAh, you can also check the charge status on the battery itself. Note: You can also check the state of charge directly at the main battery. Drive indicator Indicator is illuminated: The hard disk drive or the CD/DVD in the optical drive of the notebook is being accessed. Num Lock indicator Indicator is lit: The Num key has been pressed. The virtual numerical keypad is activated. You can output the characters indicated on the upper right of the keys. Caps Lock indicator Indicator is lit: The Caps Lock key has been pressed. All letters will be output as uppercase letters. In the case of keys labelled several times, the character printed on the upper left of the key will appear when that key is pressed. Scroll Lock indicator Indicator is lit: The key combination Fn + Scr has been pressed. The effect that this key has varies between applications. Lock Workstation indicator The indicator is illuminated: The security functions of the Notebook have locked your workstation. Fujitsu 19 Working with the notebook Opening the notebook 1 Open the LCD screen. 20 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Switching on the notebook Notebook:switchingon Power-onindicator Suspend/Resumebutton 1 Slide the ON/OFF switch (1) to the right to switch on the notebook.

The ON/OFF switch returns automatically to its original position. The ON/OFF switch (1) lights up whenever the system is switched on. Programming the ON/OFF switch You can program the ON/OFF switch:

Operating system Windows 7 Menu Start - (Settings) - Control Panel - System and Security - Power Options If you have assigned a password, you must enter this when requested to do so, in order to start the operating system. Detailed information can be found in the chapter "Security functions", Page 68. Fujitsu 21 Working with the notebook Different ways to use your notebook During your daily work, you can use your notebook as a tablet PC or as a notebook, just as you wish. Note the direction of rotation in the following description! No guarantee claims can be met for damage caused by turning in the wrong direction. You must note that the display cannot be turned completely on its own axis!

From notebook to Tablet PC Raise the LCD display into a vertical position. 22 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Hold the screen as low as possible on both sides. Turn the screen to the left or right in the direction of the arrow. At rst you will feel some slight resistance, then it will turn easily and without friction. Turn the display further until it has turned 180 and the hinge latches in. Fujitsu 23 Working with the notebook Now fold the screen down until the back of the screen is at on top of the keyboard.

The screen is now secured in the tablet position. Select display orientation (portrait or landscape orientation) DisplayorientationYou can choose to use either portrait or landscape orientation for the display. To switch between portrait or landscape orientation, press the tablet button:

Landscapeorientation Portraitorientation Windows 7 You can change these settings in the Fujitsu menu or under Start - (Settings -) Control Panel - Hardware and Sound - Display - Settings. Proles for operating with various different screen modes can be selected via the Fujitsu Tablet Control option in the Fujitsu menu. These proles have preset standard congurations that can be modied as desired. These settings do not just affect the monitor settings on the Tablet PC, but also any external monitors that may be connected. 24 Fujitsu From Tablet PC to notebook Working with the notebook 1 Raise the LCD screen into a vertical position. Fujitsu 25 Working with the notebook Note the direction of rotation in the following description! No guarantee claims can be met for damage caused by turning in the wrong direction. hold the screen as near to the bottom as possible on both sides and turn the screen in the direction indicated by the rotational direction indicator. It will turn easily and without resistance. Turn or move the display further until it has turned 180 and the hinge latches in. Switching off the notebook Notebook Close all applications and then shut down the operating system (please see the "Operating System Manual"). Slide the ON/OFF switch towards the right.

The ON/OFF switch returns automatically to its original position. 26 Fujitsu Closing the notebook Working with the notebook Fold the LCD screen down onto the lower part of the notebook until you feel it lock into place. Handwriting recognition under Windows 7 Handwriting recognition under Windows 7 currently supports the following languages:

English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Chinese (traditional and simplied), Dutch, Portuguese, Spanish, Brazilian, Norwegian (Bokml and Nynorsk), Swedish, Finnish, Danish, Polish, Rumanian, Serbian (Cyrillic and Latin script), Catalan, Russian, Czech and Croatian. Fujitsu 27 Working with the notebook LCDscreen LCD screen NotesHigh-quality TFT displays are installed in notebooks from Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH. For technical reasons, TFT monitors are manufactured for a specic resolution. An optimal, clear picture can only be ensured with the correct resolution intended for the relevant TFT monitor. A monitor resolution which differs from the specication can result in an unclear picture. The screen resolution of the LCD monitor of your notebook is optimally set at the factory. The standard of production techniques today cannot guarantee an absolutely fault-free screen display. A few isolated constant lit or unlit pixels (picture elements) may be present. The maximum permitted number of pixels faults is stipulated in the international standard ISO 9241-3 (Class II). Example:

A screen with a resolution of 1280 x 800 has 1280 x 800 = 1024000 pixels. Each pixel consists of three subpixels (red, green and blue), so there are about 3 million subpixels in total. According to ISO 9241-3 (class II), a maximum of 2 light and 2 dark pixels and in addition 5 light or 10 dark subpixels or an equivalent mix (1 light subpixel counts as 2 dark subpixels) are allowed to be defective. At a resolution of 1600 x 900 = 1440000 pixels, a maximum of 3 light and 3 dark pixels and in addition 7 light or 14 dark subpixels are allowed to be defective. Pixel A pixel consists of 3 subpixels, normally red, green and blue. A pixel is the smallest element that can be generated by complete functionality of the display. A subpixel is a separately addressable internal structure within a pixel that enhances the pixel function. A cluster contains two or more defective pixels or subpixels in a 5 x 5 pixel block. Subpixel Cluster Background lighting TFT monitors are operated with background lighting. The luminosity of the background lighting can decrease during the period of use of the notebook. However, you can set the brightness of your monitor individually. Synchronising the display on the LCD screen and an external monitor For more information, please refer to the chapter "Key combinations", Page 40 under "Display output, switch between". Ambient Light Sensor In the case of delivery with a Windows operating system, the screen brightness is regulated by means of the ambient light sensor and depending on the particular light conditions. This results in optimum readability and longer battery life at the same time. Using a device as a tablet PC You can execute commands as follows:

using the stylus pen (supplied with your device). using your ngers 28 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Using ngers You can execute certain commands by using your nger tip on the touchscreen of your device. Everything which you can select or activate using your nger tip can also be selected or activated using the stylus pen. Calibrate the Dual Digitizer for nger-based operation of the device. Please see the appropriate supplementary sheet for instructions on how to calibrate your device to use Dual Digitizer Technology. Please note: There are separate calibration programs available for calibrating the stylus pen and for calibrating nger-based operation. In each case, use the calibration tool described in the supplementary sheet. Do not use the calibration tool for the stylus pen to calibrate nger-based operation. Actions with one nger Action Selecting objects (click with the left mouse button) Starting programs (double-click with the left mouse button) Moving objects/windows (drag with left mouse button pressed, Drag & Drop) Description With your nger, tap once briey on the object. With your nger, tap twice briey in quick succssion on the program icon. Opening a context menu (click with the right mouse button) Moving the cursor Place a nger directly on the object/window, hold the nger pressed against the touchscreen and move the desired object/window. Touch the desired item once with your nger tip. Keep the nger tip pressed against the touchscreen. The context menu appears. Position one nger on the touchscreen and move the nger in the desired direction. Fujitsu 29 Working with the notebook Actions with two ngers Action Scrolling Description Position two ngers on the touchscreen. Move your ngers upwards to scroll up. or Move your ngers downwards to scroll down. Rotating Position the thumb on the touchscreen, then turn the picture clockwise or counter-clockwise using your index nger. 30 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Action Increasing or decreasing the view Description Position two ngers on the touchscreen and move them apart to increase the view. Blocking context-sensitive menus or Position two ngers on the touchscreen and move them together to decrease the view. With two ngers, tap twice briey in quick succession on the touchscreen. Fujitsu 31 Working with the notebook Using the stylus pen 2 1 4 3 1 = pen tip 2 = rocker button 3 = eyelet for pen cord 4 = eraser You can use the pen on your notebook as an electronic writing implement to select items and to navigate through menu options and programs. Programs that support handwriting recognition also allow you to write characters directly on the screen with the pen. You can also use the pen as a drawing tool. The notebook pen is retained securely in the pen slot. This ensures that the pen cannot be lost, regardless of whether you use the notebook as a Tablet PC or as a notebook, or transport it while travelling. Always replace the pen in its slot when you are not using it. The notebook is supplied with a pen cord which you can attach to the eyelets on the pen and on the notebook. Only use the pen provided with your notebook. Do not use substitute pen tips that were not specially designed for your notebook. Replace the stylus tip if it is worn. The warranty does not cover a scratched screen. While writing, you should take care not to scratch the surface of the display (e.g. with a wristwatch or bracelet). 32 Fujitsu Working with the notebook The pen of your notebook is an electronic instrument which can be damaged if used incorrectly. Handle the pen with care. The following list contains guidelines for proper pen handling:

Do not gesture with the pen. Do not use the pen as a pointer. Never use the pen on any other surface than the screen of your notebook. Do not try to turn the thumb grip on the pen. The thumb grip is used to place the pen in its slot and to take it out of the slot. Never store the pen with the tip bearing the weight of the pen (e.g. with the tip down in a pen holder). If the pen is stored with the tip pointing down, this may have an adverse effect on the pen mechanism (particularly under high temperatures). In this case the pen tip may react as though it is constantly being pressed down. To avoid damage, the pen should be stored in the pen slot when not in use. The pen can be inuenced by electromagnetic elds (cursor quivers or jumps). There may be a few areas on the screen where the cursor quivers slightly in spite of pressing the pen down rmly. The screen responds to entries made with the tip of the nger or the pen when the tip of the nger or the pen is in direct contact with the screen. You can use the pen to perform all the functions for which you would otherwise use a mouse. In addition, you can conveniently delete hand-written pen entries using the pen. Handling Selecting menu entries Starting programs Double click with the left-hand mouse Mouse Click with the left-hand mouse button. Touch the menu entry with the pen tip. Pen Moving objects/windows button. Drag with the left-hand mouse button held pressed. Briey touch the program icon twice with the pen tip. Place the pen tip directly on the object/window. Hold the pen tip pressed against the screen. Move the desired object/window. Touch the desired element with the pen and leave the pen on the element for a moment. Place the pen tip directly on the screen. Opening a context menu Click with the right-hand mouse button. Moving the cursor

Setting the pen Operating system Windows 7 Menu Under Hardware and Sound Pen and Input Devices in the Control Panel you can change various settings for the pen (assignment and function of the pen button). Fujitsu 33 Working with the notebook Calibrating the pen Before using the pen for the rst time, you should calibrate it so that the cursor follows the movements of the pen as accurately as possible. You should also always repeat the calibration if the co-ordination between the pen and cursor movement deteriorates. Operating system Windows 7 Menu To calibrate, call up the Hardware and Sound / Tablet PC Settings function in the Control Panel. You need to calibrate both portrait and landscape formats. Replacing the pen tip With use, the pen tip may become worn or may pick up foreign particles that can scratch the screen. A damaged or worn tip may not move freely, causing unpredictable results when using the pen. If your pen exhibits these problems, you should replace the pen tip. To do this, use the supplied tool (1). To remove the tip, position the tip in the gap between the two ends of the tool supplied. Pinch the two ends of the supplied tool together so that the tip is rmly clasped, then pull it from the barrel. To replace the tip, retrieve one of the new tips that were supplied your pen. Insert the at end of the tip into the barrel and exerting gentle pressure, push it in until it is rmly in place. 1 If the tip is worn or damaged, discard it. Installing a pen cord You should attach the pen with a pen cord to prevent accidentally dropping or losing it. Attach the end of the pen cord with the smaller loop to your pen. Attach the end of the pen cord with the larger loop to your notebook. 34 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Using the device as a notebook Touchpad and touchpad buttons Touchpad Keep the touchpad clean. Protect it from dirt, liquids and grease. TouchpadDo not use the touchpad if your ngers are dirty. Do not rest heavy objects (e.g. books) on the touchpad or the touchpad buttons. 1 1 = Touchpad 2 = Touchpad buttons 2 The touchpad enables you to move the mouse pointer on the screen. The touchpad buttons allow you to select and execute commands. They correspond to the buttons on a conventional mouse. You can use a key combination to disable the touchpad, to avoid accidentally moving the pointer on the screen (see also "Key combinations", Page 40). Moving the pointer Move your nger on the touchpad.

The pointer will move. Touchpad Selecting an item Move the pointer to the item you wish to select. Touchpad Tap the touchpad once or press the left button once.

The item is selected. Executing commands Move the pointer to the eld you wish to select. Touchpad Tap the touchpad twice or press the left button twice.

The command is executed. Fujitsu 35 Working with the notebook Dragging items Select the desired item. Touchpad Press and hold the left button and drag the item to the desired position with the nger on the touchpad.

The item will be moved. Switching the Touchpad on and off You can switch the Touchpad on and off using a key combination, see "Key combinations", Page 40. 36 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Keyboard Keyboard Numerickeypad Numerickeypad Buttons The keyboard of your notebook is subject to continuous wear through normal use. The key markings are especially prone to wear. The key markings are liable to wear away over the life of the notebook. The keyboard has been designed to provide all the functions of an enhanced keyboard. Some enhanced keyboard functions are mapped with key combinations. The following description of keys refers to Windows. Additional functions supported by the keys are described in the relevant manuals supplied with your application programs. The gure below shows how to access the different characters on keys with overlaid functions. The example applies when the Caps Lock key has not been activated. The illustrations shown below may differ from your actual device. Num

0

0

0

0

Alt Gr

0

Fujitsu 37 Working with the notebook Key Description Backspace key The Backspace key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Backspace Backspace Tab key The Tab key moves the cursor to the next tab stop. Tabkey Enter key (return) The Enter key terminates a command line. The command you have entered is executed when you press this key. Enterkey Return Enter Linefeed Shiftkey CapsLock Caps Lock key The Caps Lock key activates the Caps Lock mode, and the corresponding icon is displayed in the Windows information area. In Caps Lock mode, all of the characters you type appear in upper case. In the case of overlay keys, the character printed on the upper left of the key will appear when that key is pressed. To cancel the Caps Lock function, simply press the Caps Lock key again. Shift key The Shift key causes uppercase characters to appear. In the case of overlay keys, the character printed on the upper left of the key appears when that key is pressed. Fn button The Fn key enables the special functions indicated on overlay keys (see

"Key combinations", Page 40). Shiftkey Shift Fnkey Cursor keys The cursor keys move the cursor in the direction of the arrow, i.e. up, down, left, or right. Cursorkeys Cursorcontrolkeys Start key The Start key opens the Windows Start menu. Startkey Menu key The Menu key invokes the menu for the marked item. 38 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Numerickeypad Virtualnumerickeypad NumLock Virtual numeric keypad To provide the convenience of a numeric keypad, your keyboard is equipped with a virtual numeric keypad. The special keys of the virtual numeric keypad are recognisable by the numbers and symbols printed in the upper right corner of each key. If you have switched on the virtual numeric keypad, you can output the characters shown on the upper right of the keys. The keyboard layout shown below may differ from your actual device. 1 = Valid characters when the Num key is not activated 2 = Valid characters when the Num is activated Further information about the status indicators can be found in chapter "Status indicators", Page 18. Country and keyboard settings If you want to change the country and keyboard settings, proceed as follows:

Enter the settings by clicking Start (Settings) Control Panel Time, Regional and Language Options. Fujitsu 39 Working with the notebook Key combinations The key combinations described below apply when using Microsoft Windows operating systems. Some of the following key combinations may not function in other operating systems or with certain device drivers. Key combinations are entered as follows:

Press the rst key in the combination and keep it pressed. While holding the rst key down, press the other key or keys in the combination. Combination Description Switching the loudspeakers on/off This key combination switches the integrated loudspeakers on and off. Fn+F3 Loudspeaker Loudspeaker Enable/disable touchpad This key combination enables and disables the touchpad. Fn+F4 Touchpad Touchpadbuttons Touchpad Decrease screen brightness This key combination decreases the brightness of the screen. Screenbrightness Fn+F6 LCDscreen Increase screen brightness This key combination increases the brightness of the screen. Screenbrightness Fn+F7 Decrease volume This key combination reduces the volume of the internal loudspeakers. Fn+F8 Volume Increase volume This key combination increases the volume of the internal loudspeakers. Fn+F9 Volume 40 Fujitsu Combination Ctrl

C Working with the notebook Fn+F10 Description Toggle output screen ToggleoutputscreenUse this key combination to select which screen(s) is/are used for display if an external monitor is connected. Screen output is possible:

only on the notebooks LCD screen only on the external monitor on the notebooks LCD screen and the external monitor at the same time. Press the key combination several times to switch through all possible settings. It is possible to display video on two screens simultaneously, regardless of the type and number of external screens connected. If you have connected two external monitors to the port replicator, the following display outputs are possible:

only on the notebooks LCD screen only on the external monitor (analogue) at the same time on the LCD screen (digital) at the same time on the notebooks LCD screen and on the external monitor (analogue) You cannot use the key combination to switch output at the same time to both external monitors on the Port Replicator. Halt current operation This key combination can be used to halt an operation instantly without clearing the keyboard buffer. Back tab This key combination moves the cursor back to the previous tab stop. Shift+Tab Tabback Fujitsu 41 Working with the notebook Tablet buttons Your notebook has six multifunctional tablet buttons. You can navigate on the screen with a simple press of a button, call preset applications or ones that you have set yourself. The tablet buttons have different uses in different modes. In addition, you can still individually program some of the tablet buttons, see "Programming the tablet buttons", Page 43. 42 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Basic functions when the device has booted Button Basic function Windows button This button corresponds to the function of the Windows Start key on a keyboard. If the button is pressed in combination with the ON/OFF switch, the function corresponds to the key combination Ctrl + Alt + Del . Decrease volume This button reduces the volume of the built-in loudspeakers. Increase volume This button increases the volume of the built-in loudspeakers. Rotation Lock When you press this button, the orientation of the screen display changes from portrait (vertical) to landscape (horizontal) or vice versa. When you would like to use the Tablet PC as an eBook, for example, you would use the portrait orientation. When accessing spreadsheets, you would more typically use a landscape orientation. Windows 7:

This button locks and unlocks the automatic rotation of the display. Button "A"

This button starts the Fujitsu Menu application. You can use this application to change certain system settings. The button is freely programmable. Button "B"

Use this button to start the Windows Journal. The button is freely programmable. Programming the tablet buttons You can program the tablet buttons to open a specic application or execute a specic function when pressed. Proceed as follows:

In Control Panel, select the option to manage the settings for the tablet buttons and pen. Follow the instructions on the screen and program the tablet buttons as you require. Fujitsu 43 Working with the notebook Webcam WebcamDepending on the software used, you can use your Webcam to take pictures, record video clips or take part in web chats. The picture quality depends on the lighting conditions and the software being used. You can only operate the webcam with a particular application (e.g. an Internet telephony program or a video conferencing program which supports a webcam). When using the webcam the notebook support must not wobble. The webcam automatically adjusts itself to the current light level. For this reason the LCD screen may icker while the light level is adjusted. Further information on using the webcam and on the additional settings which are possible for your webcam can be found in the help function of the program which uses the webcam. If you would like to perform a function test of your web cam, there is suitable test software available at "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/index.html". 44 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Rechargeablebattery Battery Life,battery Rechargeablebattery Rechargeable battery RechargeablebatteryWhen not plugged into a mains socket, the notebook runs on its built-in battery. You can increase the life of the battery by caring for the battery properly. The average battery life is around 500 charge/discharge cycles. You can extend the battery life by taking advantage of the available energy saving functions. Battery Charging, caring for and maintaining the battery BatteryThe notebook battery can only be charged, when the ambient temperature is between 5C and max. 35C. You can charge the battery by connecting the notebook to the mains adapter

(see "Mains adapter connecting", Page 16). If the battery is running low you will hear a warning alarm. If you do not connect the mains adapter within ve minutes of the warning alarm described above, your notebook will automatically switch off. Battery monitoring the battery charging level BatterystatusmeterWindows also has a "Battery status meter" in the taskbar for monitoring the battery capacity. When you place the mouse pointer on the battery symbol, the system displays the battery status. The battery capacity can be monitored using an indicator which shows the current state of charge. Use the following menu to enable this feature:

Operating system Windows 7 Menu Start (Settings) Control panel Mobile PC Power options Self-discharge,battery Chargingcapacity,battery Battery Battery Battery storage Keep the battery pack between 0C and +30C. The lower the temperature at which the batteries are stored, the lower the rate of self-discharge. If you will be storing batteries for a longer period (longer than two months), the battery charge level should be approx. 30 %. To prevent exhaustive discharge which would permanently damage the battery, check the level of charge of the battery at regular intervals. To be able to make use of the optimal charging capacity of the batteries, the battery should be completely discharged and then fully recharged. If you do not use the batteries for long periods, remove them from the notebook. Never store the batteries in the device. Fujitsu 45 Working with the notebook Removing and installing the battery Only use rechargeable batteries approved by Fujitsu Technology Solutions for your notebook. Never use force when tting or removing a battery. Make sure that no foreign bodies get into the battery connections. Never store a battery for longer periods in the discharged state. This can make it impossible to recharge. Removing the battery Prepare for removal, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. 1 3 2 Slide the release button (1) in direction of the arrow. Slide the release button (2) in direction of the arrow. Lift the battery out of the battery compartment (3). 46 Fujitsu Inserting battery Working with the notebook 3 2 1 Place the battery on the lower edge of the battery compartment (1). Slide the battery into the battery compartment until you feel it engage (2). Slide the release button into its locked position (3). Complete the removal, see chapter "Finishing component removal", Page 89. Fujitsu 47 Working with the notebook Battery charge status indicator You can check the charge status directly on the battery itself. a 11 Press the key (1).

The LED (a) lights up in one of the following colours:

LED indicator Green Orange Red LED not lit State of charge The battery is between 50 % and 100 %

charged. The battery is between 11 % and 49 % charged. The battery is between 1 % and 10 % charged. The battery is fully discharged. 48 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Modulebay Module ModulesThe design of your notebook enables the exible use of notebook batteries and drives. The following modules can be operated in the module bay of your notebook:

Optical drive Empty plug-in unit (save weight) Second battery Only use modules designed for your notebook. Do not use force when installing or removing the module. Make sure that no foreign objects enter the module bay. You can swap modules during operation. This means you do not need to switch off the notebook. To replace a module, simply click on the corresponding icon in the task bar and then on Exit or Select - Exit. The module can now be removed without any further actions being necessary. Removing a module 1 2 Module DriveWeightSaver Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow (1). Now pull the module out of the module bay (2). Fujitsu 49 Working with the notebook Installing a module Place the module into the module bay so that the contacts enter rst. Push the module into the module bay until you feel it locking into place. Optical drive Opticaldrive This product contains a light emitting diode, classication according to IEC 60825 1:2007: LASER CLASS 1, and must therefore not be opened. Handling data carriers HandlingObserve the following guidelines when handling data carriers:

Avoid touching the surface of a data carrier. Only handle data carriers by their edges. Always store data carriers in their cases. This will protect the data carrier against being covered in dust, scratched or damaged in any other way. Protect your data carriers against dust, mechanical vibrations and direct sunlight. Avoid storing a data carrier in areas subject to high temperatures or humidity. You may use both 8-cm and 12-cm data carriers in the optical drive. When using a data carrier of lesser quality, vibrations and reading errors may occur. 50 Fujitsu Working with the notebook CD/DVDindicator CD/DVD indicator The CD/DVD indicator ashes when a data carrier is inserted. The indicator goes out when the drive is ready for reading. The indicator lights up when the drive is being accessed. You may only remove the data carrier when the indicator is unlit. If the CD/DVD indicator does not go out after a data carrier has been inserted, but instead continues to ash, this means that the drive cannot access the data carrier. Either the data carrier is damaged or dirty or you are using a data carrier that the drive cannot read. Inserting or removing a data carrier RemovingThe notebook must be switched on. Inserting Push the insert/eject button (1).

The drive tray will open. Gently pull the drive tray (2) completely out. 2 1 Place the data carrier in the drive tray with the printed side facing upwards. or Remove a data carrier that has been inserted. Push in the drive tray until you feel it lock into place. Fujitsu 51 Working with the notebook Manual removal (emergency removal) In the event of a power failure or damage to the drive, you can remove the data carrier manually. CD/DVD:

Manualremovalofdatacarrier Emergencyremovalofdatacarrier Switch your notebook off. Push a pen or a piece of wire (such as a paperclip) rmly into the opening (1).

The drive tray is ejected. You can now pull the drive tray (2) out of the drive. 2 1 Removing and tting the dust removal cover

(ventilation slot cover) In order to ensure optimum cooling of the components in your notebook, you should periodically clean the ventilation slot of the heatsink. This ensures optimum fan performance. You can achieve the best cleaning results with a small hand-held vacuum cleaner. If necessary, you can also use a dry brush to release dust from the ventilation slots. Do not use any cleaning liquids! Ensure that no liquid enters the device. To avoid overheating of the device, do not remove the ventilation slot cover when the device is switched on. Prepare for removal, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Press and hold the lock of the ventilation slot cover (1) and remove it from its slot (2). Clean the dust chamber. 2 1 52 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Insert the ventilation slot cover into the slot (1) at an angle as shown, and ensure that you feel it click into place. Complete the removal, see chapter

"Finishing component removal", Page 89. 1 Fujitsu 53 Working with the notebook Using the power-management features BatteryThe notebook uses less power when the available power-management features are used. You will then be able to work longer when using the battery before having to recharge it. Power Power Power efciency is increased and environmental pollution reduced. By choosing the best power options, you can make signicant savings and at the same time help protect the environment. When you close the LCD screen, depending on the setting in Windows, the notebook automatically enters a power saving mode. We recommend the following settings:

Function Turn off monitor Turn off hard disk(s) Energy saving (S3) Hibernate mode (S4) On external power After 10 minutes After 15 minutes After 20 minutes After 1 hour On battery power After 5 minutes After 10 minutes After 15 minutes After 30 minutes Select the power management functions in your Control Panel. Select the Screen Saver in your Control Panel. or Right-click on the desktop. Switch on the screen saver by clicking Personalization Change screen saver. If you need further information about an option, you can get help with most settings by pressing F1 to open the Microsoft Help. When the notebook is in power-saving mode, the following must be remembered:

During power saving mode, open les are held in the main memory or in a swap le on the hard disk. Never turn off your notebook while it is in a power saving mode. If the built-in battery is nearly empty, close the open les and do not go into power saving mode. If you do not intend to use your notebook for a long period of time:

Exit power saving mode if necessary via the mouse or keyboard or by switching on the notebook. Close all opened programs and completely shut down the notebook. 54 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Memory cards SlotYour notebook is equipped with an integrated memory card reader. Observe the manufacturers instructions when handling the memory cards. Memorycard Supported format The memory card reader supports the following format:

Secure Digital (SDTM card) Inserting the memory card Carefully slide the memory card into the slot. The label should be facing upward. Do not apply excessive force, as otherwise the delicate contact surfaces could be damaged. Memorycard

Depending on the particular type used, the memory card may protrude slightly from the slot. Fujitsu 55 Working with the notebook Removing the memory card Memorycard In order to protect your data, always follow the correct procedure for removing the card outlined below. You can stop the memory card via the corresponding icon in the task bar:

Left-click on the icon. Select the card you want to stop and remove. Press the Enter key.

Wait for the dialogue box which tells you that it is now safe to remove the memory card. On devices with card locking: Press on the storage card (1). Memorycard

The storage card is released and can now be removed. Pull the storage card out of the slot (2). 1 2 ExpressCards An ExpressCard slot allows an ExpressCard/54 to be used with the computer. SlotExpressCard Consult the documentation supplied by the ExpressCards manufacturer and follow the instructions provided. Never use force when installing or removing an ExpressCard. Make sure that no foreign objects enter the ExpressCard slot. 56 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Inserting the card Keep the placeholder for the slot in a safe place. When you remove the card again, you must reinstall the place holder. This prevents foreign objects from getting into the slot. 1 2 Press the edge of the placeholder (1) to make the card placeholder protrude from the notebooks case. Pull the card placeholder out of the slot (2). Insert the card into the slot guide with the connection contacts rst. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel it click into place. Do not use any force. Depending on the particular type used, the card may protrude slightly from the slot. Please see the documentation relating to the card for driver installation instructions. Fujitsu 57 Working with the notebook Removing the card Always remove the card according to the rules described below, to ensure that none of your data is lost. You can stop the ExpressCard using the corresponding symbol in the task bar:

Click on the symbol for safe removal of hardware with the left mouse button. Select the ExpressCard you want to stop and remove. Press the Enter key.

Wait for the dialogue box which tells you that it is now safe to remove the ExpressCard. Press the edge of the card (1) so that the card protrudes a little from the notebook. Pull the card out of the slot (2). 1 2 2 Insert the card placeholder into the slot guide. Gently slide the card placeholder into the slot until you feel it click into place. Microphone Loudspeakers Bassloudspeaker(subwoofer) Loudspeakers and microphones VolumecontrolInformation on the exact position of the speakers and microphone can be found in "Ports and controls", Page 9. Please refer to chapter "Key combinations", Page 40 for information on setting the volume and also enabling/disabling the loudspeakers using key combinations. If you attach an external microphone, the built-in microphone is disabled. When you connect headphones or external speakers, the built-in speakers are disabled. Information on connecting headphones and a microphone can be found in "Connecting external devices", Page 75. 58 Fujitsu Working with the notebook SIM card A SIM card (Subscriber Identity Module) is a chip card which is inserted in a mobile phone or notebook and, together with an integrated UMTS/LTE module, enables access to a mobile network. When handling SIM cards, follow the instructions supplied by the provider. Inserting the SIM card Prepare for installation of the SIM card, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Slide the SIM card into the slot (1) until it is felt to engage, as shown in the battery compartment. 1 Complete the installation, see chapter "Finishing component removal", Page 89. Removing the SIM card Prepare for removal of the SIM card, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Press on the edge of the SIM card so that it jumps up slightly out of the slot. Pull the SIM card out of the slot in the direction of the arrow (1). 1 Complete the removal, see chapter "Finishing component removal", Page 89. Fujitsu 59 Working with the notebook Optional Wireless LAN / Bluetooth / UMTS /

LTE wireless components The installation of radio components not approved by Fujitsu Technology Solutions will invalidate the certications issued for this device. Depending on the device conguration you ordered, your device will be equipped with Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and/or UMTS / LTE. Switching the wireless components on and off Before switching on your device for the rst time, the on/off switch for radio components must be in the "ON" position. Slide the ON/OFF switch into the "ON"

position to activate the radio components. or WirelessLAN WirelessLAN Bluetooth Bluetooth Slide the ON/OFF switch to the

"OFF" position to deactivate the radio components. If you switch off the radio components, the wireless LAN antenna and, when present, the Bluetooth module and UMTS/LTE module will be switched off. You can use the PlugfreeNetwork program to switch the installed radio components on and off individually. You can also deactivate the wireless components individually in the BIOS Setup. For this to occur, you must either not have assigned a supervisor password or if a supervisor password has been assigned, you must know this password. Pay attention to the additional safety notes for devices with radio components provided in the "Safety/Regulations" manual. Details on using Wireless LAN can be found in the online help system included in the Wireless LAN software. You can nd more information on how to use Bluetooth on the CD you received with your Bluetooth software. You can obtain more information on UMTS/LTE from your service provider. 60 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Setting up WLAN access Requirement: A WLAN must be available and you must have the corresponding access information. Information on conguring the WLAN access can be found in the documentation for your operating system. Access via UMTS / LTE If you ordered an integrated UMTS / LTE module with your system, you can enjoy optimum reception and maximum energy efciency without awkward cables or antennas. The optional UMTS / LTE module is ready for use straight away. If you did not order a UMTS / LTE module, you can purchase the accessories for UMTS /

LTE reception from your retailer or your Fujitsu Technology Solutions dealer. You will nd information on establishing the connection with the UMTS / LTE network in the documentation for the hardware used. Your device can connect to the Internet via UMTS / LTE. To do this, use one of the following types of connection:

Integrated UMTS / LTE module (availability dependent on your model variant) a USB dongle (a USB stick with your mobile phone providers SIM card) a mobile end-device (e.g. mobile phone with Bluetooth or cable connection) UMTS ExpressCard (ts into the ExpressCard slot on your device) UMTS/LTE antenna To improve the signal strength of the UMTS/LTE, fold out the UMTS/LTE antenna in the direction of the arrow (1). UMTS UMTS 1 Fujitsu 61 Working with the notebook Ethernet and LAN EthernetLANThe internal network module of your notebook supports Ethernet LAN. You can use it to establish a connection to a local network (LAN = Local Area Network). Connect the network cable to the LAN port of the notebook (1). Connect the network cable to your network connection (2). 1 2 Your network administrator can help you to congure and use the LAN connections. The network cable is not included in the delivery scope. This type of cable can be obtained from a specialist dealer. Your Port Replicator (optional) Your Port Replicator is a device that enables you to quickly connect your notebook to your peripherals, such as a monitor, printer etc. The features offered by the Port Replicator include standard ports for monitor, audio, mouse and keyboard. You need only dock the notebook in order to use your peripheral devices. 62 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Ports on the Port Replicator PortReplicator Ports 1 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 1 = ON/OFF switch 2 = USB ports (USB 3.0) 3 = DVI port 4 = DisplayPort 5 = VGA monitor port 6 = LAN port 7 = Headphone port 11 8 = Security Lock device 9 = DC input connector (DC IN) 10 = Adjusting lever of the Port Replicator 11 = Unlocking lever 12 = Connector on the Port Replicator for the docking port on the bottom of the notebook Fujitsu 63 Working with the notebook Setting up the port replicator Select a suitable location for the port replicator before setting it up. Follow the instructions below when doing so:

Never place the port replicator on a soft surface (e.g. carpeting, upholstered furniture, bed). This can block the air vents of the notebook and cause overheating and damage. Place the port replicator on a stable, at and non-slip surface. Please note that the port replicators rubber feet may mark certain types of surface. Never place the port replicator and the mains adapter on a heat-sensitive surface. Do not expose the port replicator to extreme environmental conditions. Protect the port replicator from dust, humidity and heat. Connect the notebook to the port replicator The Port Replicator supports various LIFEBOOK models. The adjusting lever of the Port Replicator can be used to adapt the Port Replicator to the size of the particular LIFEBOOK. Before connecting the notebook to the port replicator, check if the setting lever of the port replicator is in the right position. the setting lever to the correct position. If necessary, adjust Disconnect the mains adapter cable from the DC socket (DC IN) of the notebook. 64 Fujitsu Working with the notebook 3 1 2 Position the notebook on the port replicator in such a way that the docking connector on the underside of the notebook is aligned with the docking connector of the port replicator as shown. Press down on the notebooks rear corners so that it locks into position. Connect the mains adapter cable to the DC jack (DC IN) of the port replicator (1). Connect the power cable to the mains adapter (2). Plug the power cable into the mains socket (3). Fujitsu 65 Working with the notebook Switching on the notebook via the port replicator Press the ON/OFF switch on the port replicator to switch the notebook on. Switching off notebook via Port Replicator Close all applications and shut down your operating system (please refer to the manual for the operating system). If the notebook cannot be shut down properly, press the ON/OFF button on the Port Replicator for approx. four seconds. The notebook will switch off. Any unsaved data may however be lost. 66 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Disconnecting the notebook from the port replicator Problems may occur if the notebook is removed from the port replicator during operation. We recommend that you switch off the notebook beforehand or use the Windows function Start Undock. Windows 7 Problems may occur if the notebook is removed from the port replicator during operation. We recommend that you switch off the notebook beforehand or use the Windows function Start (arrow icon) Undock. 2 Pull the release button in the direction of the arrow (1). Pick up the notebook (2). 1 Fujitsu 67 Security functions Security functions SecurityfunctionsYour notebook has several security features that you can use to secure your system from unauthorised access. This chapter explains how to use each function, and what the benets are. Please remember that in some cases, for example, forgetting your password, you may be locked out and unable to access your data. Therefore, please note the following information:

Make regular backups to external data carriers such as external hard drives, CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs. Some security functions need you to choose passwords. Make a note of the passwords and keep them in a safe place. If you forget your passwords you will need to contact the our Service Desk. Deletion or resetting of passwords is not covered by your warranty and a charge will be made for assistance. Brief overview of security functions Detailed information about the security equipment of your device can be found in the "Professional Notebook" manual, on the "Drivers & Utilities" CD/DVD or on the Internet at "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/index.html". Security functions Security Lock Fingerprint sensor (depending on the device) BIOS password protection Boot from removable media Owner Information Trusted Platform Module

(device dependent) Type of protection Mechanical Biometric Password protection for BIOS Setup, operating system and hard disk with supervisor and user password. The passwords consist of a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Prevents unauthorised booting of an operating system from external media (e.g. USB stick, USB CD-ROM drive etc.). Overlay service desk or owner information during the boot process. Identication and authentication of the notebook Preparation Fit and lock the Kensington Lock Cable (accessory). Install the supplied ngerprint software. Specify at least one supervisor password in the BIOS Setup and activate the password protection for the operating system and hard disk as desired. In the BIOS Setup, go to the Security menu and edit the option Boot from Removable Media. In the BIOS Setup, go to the Security menu and edit the option Owner Information. Dene a supervisor password in the BIOS Setup and enable the TPM (Security Chip). 68 Fujitsu Security functions Conguring the ngerprint sensor FingerprintsensorThe ngerprint sensor can record an image of a ngerprint. With additional ngerprint software, this image can be processed and used instead of a password. Fingerprintsensor You must install the ngerprint software in order to be able to use the ngerprint sensor (1). 1 Using the Security Lock Your device comes with a Security Lock device for the Kensington Lock Cable. You can use the Kensington Lock Cable, a sturdy steel cable, to help protect your notebook from theft. The Kensington Lock Cable is available as an accessory. Fujitsu Technology Solutions recommends the use of a combination lock. Fit the Kensington Lock Cable on the device on your notebook. UsingtheKensingtonLockCable SecurityLock Mechanicalbackup Anti-theftprotection Attach another Kensington Lock Cable to your Port Replicator to protect your Port Replicator from theft as well. Fujitsu 69 Security functions Conguring password protection in BIOS Setup Utility Before using the various options for password protection in the BIOS Setup utility to increase data security, please observe the following:

Make a note of the passwords and keep them in a safe place. If you forget your supervisor password you will not be able to access your notebook. Passwords are not covered by your warranty and a charge will be made for assistance. Passwordprotection Your password can be up to eight characters long and contain letters and numbers. No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase. Protecting BIOS Setup Utility (supervisor and user password) If you have opened these operating instructions on the screen, we recommend that you print out the following instructions. Because you cannot call the instructions onto the screen while you are setting up the password. BIOS SetupUtilityYou prevent unauthorised use of the BIOS Setup Utility with both the supervisor and the user password. The supervisor password gives you access to all functions of the BIOS Setup Utility, while the user password only provides some of the functions. You can only set a user password if a supervisor password has already been assigned. Please refer to the ""Settings in BIOS Setup Utility", Page 90 section for a description of how to call up and operate the BIOS Setup Utility. Setting supervisor and user password Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Select the Set Supervisor Password eld and press the Enter key.

With Enter new Password: you are asked to enter a password. Enter the password and press the Enter key.

Conrm new Password requires you to conrm the password. Enter the password again and press the Enter key.

Changes have been saved is a conrmation that the new password has been saved. To set the user password, select Set User Password and proceed exactly as when conguring the supervisor password.

If you do not want to change any other settings, you can exit BIOS Setup Utility. In the Exit menu, select the option Save Changes & Exit. Select Yes and press the Enter key.

The notebook will be rebooted and the new password will come into effect. It will now be Password Supervisorpassword Userpassword necessary to rst enter your supervisor or user password in order to open the BIOS Setup Utility. Please note that the user password only provides access to a few of the BIOS settings. 70 Fujitsu Security functions Changing the supervisor or user password You can only change the supervisor password when you have logged into the BIOS Setup Utility with the supervisor password. Userpassword Call the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. When changing the password, proceed exactly as for password assignment. Password Supervisorpassword Password Supervisorpassword Removing passwords To remove a password (without setting a new password) perform the following steps:

Userpassword Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Highlight the Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password eld and press the Enter key.

You will be requested to enter the current password by the Enter Current Password prompt. You will be requested to enter a new password by the Enter New Password prompt. Press the Enter key twice. In the Exit menu, select the option Save Changes & Exit. Select Yes and press the Enter key.

The notebook will now reboot with the password removed. Removing the supervisor password simultaneously deactivates the user password. Password protection for booting of the operating system With the supervisor password you have set in the BIOS Setup Utility (see section "Setting supervisor and user password", Page 70), you can also prevent booting of the operating system. Operatingsystem Activating system protection Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Operatingsystem Select the Password on Boot option and press the Enter key. Select the desired option (Disabled, First Boot or Every Boot) and press the Enter key Select the Save Changes & Exit option under Exit.

The notebook will reboot. You will be prompted to enter your password (the supervisor password). Deactivating system protection Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Operatingsystem Select the Password on Boot option and press the Enter key. Select the Disabled option and press the Enter key.

If you do not want to change any other settings, you can exit BIOS Setup Utility. Select the Save Changes & Exit option under Exit.

The notebook will reboot. The system is no longer password-protected. Fujitsu 71 Security functions Password protection for the hard disk Passwordprotection:

The had disk password prevents unauthorised access to the hard disk drives and is checked internally each time the system is booted. The condition for this is that you have assigned at least the supervisor password. Activating hard disk protection Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu.

If you have not assigned BIOS passwords yet, dene the supervisor and the user password now, if desired (see "Security functions", Page 68). Mark the Hard Disk Security eld and press the Enter key. In the Drive0 area mark the Set Master Password eld and press the Enter key.

Enter new Password then appears and you are asked to enter a password. Enter the password and press the Enter key.

Conrm new Password requires you to conrm the password. Enter the password again and press the Enter key.

Setup Notice: Changes have been saved is displayed to conrm that the new password has been saved. To assign the password for the second hard disk (Drive1), go to the Drive1 area and select the eld Set Master Password, then proceed in exactly the same way as for setting up the password for the rst hard disk (Drive0).

The eld Password Entry on Boot is set to Enabled by default. You can exit the BIOS Setup once you have nished changing the settings. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

The notebook reboots and your hard disk is now protected with a password. The system will ask you to enter the password when the notebook is restarted again. Deactivating hard disk protection To cancel a password without setting a new one, proceed as follows:

Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the Hard Disk Security eld and press the Enter key. In the Drive0 area mark the Set Master Password eld and press the Enter key.

You will be initially requested to enter the old password by the Enter current Password prompt. You will then be requested to enter a new password by the Enter new Password prompt. After entering the password, press the Enter key three times. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

The notebook reboots, and password protection for the hard disk is cancelled. To cancel the password for the second hard disk (Drive1), go to the Drive1 area and select the eld Set Master Password, then proceed in exactly the same way as for cancelling the password for the rst hard disk (Drive0). 72 Fujitsu Security functions Using the security function of the tablet keys If you have allotted a supervisor and/or user password in the form of tablet key combinations as described below, you can use the tablet keys to enter this when you start your device. Setting the Supervisor password Select Start - Run. Enter the following at the command line: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\FJSECS.EXE. Conrm with Enter . Follow the instructions on the screen. Setting the User password Select Start - All Programs. Select Security Panel Application Security Panel Application. Follow the instructions on the screen. Entering passwords using the tablet buttons The passwords to be entered via the tablet buttons are usually composed of a combination of button presses, e.g. button 2 + button 3 followed by button 1 and the ENT button. Enter your password using the buttons 1 to 4 . Conrm by pressing ENT .

The device will be unlocked. Fujitsu 73 Security functions Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (device-dependent) TPMTrustedPlatformModuleTo use the TPM, you must activate the TPM in the BIOS Setup before the software is installed. The condition for this is that you have assigned at least the supervisor password (see "Security functions", Page 68). Requirement: You have assigned a supervisor password, see "Security functions", Page 68. Enabling TPM Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the TPM Security Chip Setting eld and press the Enter key. Select Enabled to activate the TPM.

Once you have activated the TPM the Clear Security Chip option appears. Select Clear Security Chip to delete the holder in the TPM. By clicking on Enabled, all secret keys (e.g. SRK - Storage Root Keys, AIK - Attestation Identity Keys etc.) generated by applications are deleted. Please note that you will then no longer be able to access the data you have encrypted with the keys based on that holder. Select the Exit Saving Changes option in the Exit menu. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

The notebook will restart, and TPM will be enabled after the reboot. Requirement: You have assigned a supervisor password, see "Security functions", Page 68. Disabling TPM Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the TPM Security Chip Setting eld and press the Enter key. Select Disabled to deactivate the TPM. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

Your notebook will now restart and TPM will be disabled. 74 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting external devices Always refer to the safety information provided in "Important notes", Page 12 before connecting or disconnecting any devices to or from your notebook. Always read the documentation supplied with the device you wish to connect. Never connect or disconnect cables during a thunderstorm. Never pull at a cable when disconnecting it. Always grasp the plug. Follow the steps below in order, when connecting or disconnecting devices to your notebook:

With some devices such as USB devices, it is not necessary to switch off the notebook and the device before connecting/disconnecting. For more information about whether or not devices need to be switched off, please refer to the documentation supplied with the external device. Some of the external devices require special drivers (see the operating system and external device documentation). Connecting devices to the notebook 1. Turn off your notebook and all external devices. 2. Unplug your notebook and all devices from the mains sockets. 3. Connect the cables for your external devices following the instructions. 4. Plug all power cables into the mains sockets. Peripheraldevices Devices Disconnecting devices from the notebook 1. Turn off your notebook and all external devices. 2. Unplug your notebook and all devices from the mains sockets. 3. Disconnect the cables for your external devices following the instructions. Devices Peripheraldevices Fujitsu 75 Connecting external devices Connecting an external monitor The Port Replicator, available as an option for your notebook, offers you a DVI port and a DisplayPort. An analogue monitor is connected to the analogue VGA monitor port, a digital monitor to the DVI-I monitor port of the port replicator. Screen output is limited to a maximum of two screens at any one time (see "Key combinations", Page 40, section "Toggle output screen"). Monitor VGAconnectionsocket Screenport Monitorport Digital DVI monitor port Analogue VGA monitor port Switch off the notebook and the external monitor. Plug the data cable of the external monitor into the monitor port. First switch on the external monitor and then the notebook. You can also switch back and forth between the external monitor and the notebooks LCD monitor, see chapter "Key combinations", Page 40. You can display the same picture on the external monitor and the notebook LCD screen simultaneously. 76 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting an external monitor to the DisplayPort It is possible to connect a digital monitor to the DisplayPort on the port replicator. Screen output is limited to a maximum of two screens at any one time (see "Key combinations", Page 40, section "Toggle output screen"). Digital DisplayPort Switch off the notebook and the external monitor. Plug the data cable of the external monitor into the monitor port. First switch on the external monitor and then the notebook. You can also switch between the external monitor and the LCD monitor of the notebook, see chapter "Key combinations", Page 40. You can display the same picture on the external monitor and the notebook LCD monitor simultaneously. Fujitsu 77 Connecting external devices HDMI port The HDMI port on your notebook can be used to connect an external amplier, LCD TV or a plasma TV with an HDMI connection. HDMIport Connect the data cable to the external device. Connect the data cable to the HDMI port of the notebook. Some LCD televisions have only two loudspeaker connections and therefore cannot reproduce Dolby digital or DTS. In order to reproduce the sound, you must go into Windows and adjust the sound settings. Proceed as follows:

Select Startsymbol (Settings) Control Panel Hardware and Sound Sound. Mark Realtek HDMI Output. Select Properties Supported formats. Deactivate the settings DTS audio and Dolby digital. Conrm the settings with OK. 78 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting USB devices USBportsOn the USB ports, you can connect external devices that also have a USB port

(e.g. a DVD drive, a printer, a scanner or a modem). USB devices are hot-pluggable. This means you can connect and disconnect devices while your operating system is running. USB 1.x has a maximum data transfer rate of 12 Mbit/s. USB 2.0 has a data transfer rate of up to 480 Mbit/s. USB 3.0 has a data transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s. Additional information can be found in the documentation for the USB devices. Connect the data cable to the external device. Connect the data cable to a USB port of the notebook. Device drivers USB devices will be automatically recognised and installed by your operating system. Fujitsu 79 Connecting external devices USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge) USBchargingfunction It is recommended that the notebook be operated with the power supply connected whenever the USB port with charging function is in use, as this function will drain the battery more quickly if an external USB device is being charged. The power supply unit must already be connected when the notebook is switched off, as otherwise the USB charging function will be disabled and the connected USB devices will not be charged. Some USB devices (e.g. mobile telephones) require a driver in order to utilise the USB charging function. In this case the USB charging function will not work when the notebook is switched off, as no drivers are active when the notebook is switched off. You can use this USB port to charge or supply power to a USB device (e.g. to charge a PDA or a mobile phone or to connect a USB lamp), even if the notebook is switched off. How to remove USB devices correctly Always correctly remove the device according to the rules described below, to ensure that none of your data is lost. Left click on the icon to safely remove hardware, located in the taskbar. Select the device which you want to shut down and remove. Press the Enter key.

Wait for the dialogue box which tells you that it is now safe to remove the device. 80 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting external audio devices Microphone port/Line In Microphone,connectingThe microphone port/Line In allows you to connect an external microphone, a MiniDisc player, MP3 player, CD player or a tape deck to your notebook. Audiodevices,connecting Audioports Connect the audio cable to the external device. Connect the audio cable to the microphone port/Line In of the notebook. Headphone port ConnectingheadphonesYou can connect headphones or external loudspeakers to your notebook via the headphone port. Connectingaudio devices Audioports Connect the audio cable to the external device. Connect the audio cable to the headphone port of the notebook.

The internal loudspeakers are disabled. If you purchase a cable from a retailer, please note the following information:

The headphone port on your notebook is a "3.5 mm jack socket". If you want to connect headphones or a speaker you will need a "3.5 mm jack plug". Fujitsu 81 Removing and installing components during servicing Removing and installing components during servicing Only qualied technicians should repair your notebook. Unauthorised opening or incorrect repair may greatly endanger the user (electric shock, re risk) and will invalidate your warranty. Servicing Components After consulting the Hotline/Service Desk, you may remove and install the components described in this chapter yourself. If you remove and install components without consulting the Hotline/Service Desk, then the warranty of your notebook will be voided. Notes on installing and removing boards and components Switch the notebook off and pull the power plug out of the mains socket. Always remove the battery. Take care when you use the locking mechanisms on the battery and any other component. Never use sharp objects such as screwdrivers, scissors or knives as leverage to remove covers. Notes Board ESD Boards with electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are marked with the label shown. When handling boards tted with ESDs, you must always observe the following points:

You must always discharge static build up (e.g. by touching a grounded object) before working. The equipment and tools you use must be free of static charges. Remove the power plug from the mains supply before inserting or removing boards containing ESDs. Always hold boards with ESDs by their edges. Never touch pins or conductors on boards tted with ESDs. 82 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Preparing to remove components If you are going to remove or change system components, prepare for the removal as follows:

Please observe the safety information in chapter "Important notes", Page 12. Remove the power plug from the mains outlet !

Switch the device off. The device must not be in energy-saving mode !

Close the LCD screen. Remove all the cables from the device. Turn the device over and place it on a stable, at and clean surface. If necessary, lay an anti-slip cloth on this surface to prevent the device from being scratched. Remove the battery (see "Removing the battery", Page 46). Installing and removing memory expansion If you are asked by the Hotline/Service Desk to remove and install the memory expansion yourself, proceed as follows:

Removingmemory Systemexpansion Systemexpansion Memorymodule Mainmemory Please observe the safety information in chapter "Important notes", Page 12. When installing/removing memory modules, the battery must be removed from the notebook and the notebook must not be connected to the power supply, see "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Only use memory expansion modules that have been approved for your notebook (see "Technical data", Page 99). Never use force when installing or removing a memory extension. Make sure that foreign objects do not fall into the memory extension compartment. You must open the service compartment to remove or install a memory module. On some devices, opening the compartment may expose other components. These components should be removed and replaced only by authorised specialists. Therefore, be sure to observe the following:

Individual components can become very hot during operation. Therefore, we recommend that you wait one hour after switching off the notebook before removing or installing memory modules. Otherwise, there is a risk of suffering burns!

As some components are exposed that are sensitive to static electricity, please take note of chapter "Notes on installing and removing boards and components", Page 82. Fujitsu 83 Removing and installing components during servicing Removing a cover 1 2 Remove the screw (1). Pull off the cover from the notebook in the direction of the arrow (2). Removing memory modules Carefully push the two mounting clips outwards (1). 3 2 1 1 Memoryexpansion Memorymodule

The memory module snaps upwards (2). Pull the memory module out of its slot in the direction of the arrow (3). 84 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Insert the memory module with the contacts and the recess (a) facing the slot (1). Memorymodule Carefully push the memory module Memoryexpansion downwards until you feel into place (2). it click Installing a memory module 1 2 2 a Attaching the cover 2 1 Place the cover into position, following the direction of the arrow (1). Fasten the cover with the screw (2). Install the battery again (see "Removing and installing the battery", Page 46). Turn the notebook the right way up again and place it on a at surface. Reconnect the cables that were previously disconnected. Fujitsu 85 Removing and installing components during servicing Removing and installing the hard disk Removing a cover 1 2 3 Remove the screw (1). Keep the screw in a safe place. If you are removing more than one component at the same time, store the screws for the individual components separate from each other. If you install the wrong screws, components may be damaged. Slide the cover in direction of the arrow (2). Lift the cover off the notebook (3). 86 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Removing a hard disk 2 1 To release the hard disk from the contacts, pull it in the direction of the arrow (1). Remove the hard disk from the hard disk compartment (2). Fujitsu 87 Removing and installing components during servicing Installing a hard disk 2 1 Place the hard disk into the hard disk compartment (1). Push the hard disk in the direction of the arrow (2) until the contacts of the hard disk engage. 88 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Attaching the cover 3 2 1 Place the cover in the correct mounting position (1). Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow (2). Tighten the screw (3). Finishing component removal After you have removed or changed the system components as you required, please prepare your device for operation again as follows:

Install the battery again (see "Inserting battery", Page 47). Turn the notebook the right way up again and place it on a at surface. Reconnect the cables that you disconnected before. Fujitsu 89 Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Settings in BIOS Setup Utility BIOS SetupUtility Systemsettings,BIOSSetupUtility Conguration,BIOSSetupUtility Setup Systemconguration HardwarecongurationThe BIOS Setup Utility allows you to set the system functions and the hardware conguration for the notebook. When it is delivered, the notebook is set to factory default settings. You can change these settings in BIOS Setup Utility. Any changes you make take effect as soon as you save and exit the BIOS Setup Utility. The BIOS Setup Utility program contains the following menus:

About System Advanced Displays information relating to the BIOS, processor and notebook Advanced system settings Conguration of various hardware components, such as mouse, keyboard, processor Password settings and security functions Conguration of the start-up sequence Exits the BIOS Setup Utility Security Boot Exit Starting the BIOS Setup Utility Reboot the device (switch off/on or reboot the operating system).

The following or a similar display appears on the screen at start-up:

BIOSSetupUtility

<F2> BIOS Setup <F12> Boot Menu Press the function key F2 . If a password has been assigned, enter the password and press the Enter key. If you have forgotten the password, contact your system administrator or contact our customer service centre. The BIOS Setup Utility starts. Operating BIOS Setup Utility BIOS SetupUtility Press the F1 key to display help on the operation of the BIOS Setup Utility. The description of the individual settings is shown in the right-hand window of the BIOS Setup Utility. With the F9 key you can load the default settings of the BIOS Setup Utility. Use the cursor keys or to select the menu you wish to access to make changes.

The menu is displayed on the screen. Select the option you want to change with the cursor keys or Press the Enter key. Press the ESC key to exit the selected menu. For future reference, make a note of the changes you have made (for example, in this manual). 90 Fujitsu Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Exiting BIOS Setup Utility BIOS SetupUtilityYou need to select the desired option in the Exit menu and activate it by pressing the Enter key:

Exit Saving Changes - save changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility To save the current menu settings and exit the BIOS Setup Utility, select Exit Saving Changes and Yes.

The notebook is rebooted and the new settings come into effect. Exit Discarding Changes Discard changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility To discard the changes, select Exit Discarding Changes and Yes.

The settings in place when BIOS Setup Utility was called remain effective. BIOS Setup Utility is terminated and the notebook is rebooted. Load Setup Defaults Copy Standard Entries To copy the standard entries for all menus of the BIOS Setup Utility, choose Load Setup Defaults and Yes. Discard Changes Discard changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility To discard the changes you have made, select Discard Changes and Yes.

The settings in place when BIOS Setup Utility was called remain effective. You can now make additional settings in the BIOS Setup Utility. If you want to exitBIOS Setup Utilitywith these settings, select Exit Saving Changes and Yes. Save Changes - save changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility To save the changes, select Save Changes and Yes.

The changes are saved. You can now make additional settings in the BIOS Setup Utility. If you want to exit BIOS Setup Utility with these settings, choose Exit Saving Changes and Yes. Save Changes and Power Off To save the changes and switch off your device, select Save Changes and Power Off and Yes.

The changes are saved. Your device is shut down. Fujitsu 91 Troubleshooting and tips Troubleshooting and tips Troubleshooting TipsFault Troubleshooting Follow the safety notes in the "Safety/Regulations" manual when connecting or disconnecting cables. If a fault occurs, try to correct it as described. If you fail to correct the problem, proceed as follows:

Make a note of the steps and the circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a note of any error messages displayed. Switch the notebook off. Please contact the Hotline/Service Desk. You can nd the telephone numbers in the service desk list. Please have the following information ready when you call:

The model name and serial number of the notebook. The serial number is located on a sticker on the underside of the notebook. Notes of any messages that appear on the screen and information on acoustic signals. Any changes you have made to the hardware or software since receiving the notebook. Any changes you have made to the BIOS Setup settings since receiving the notebook. Your system conguration and all peripheral devices connected to your system. Your sales contract. Our notebooks have been designed primarily with mobile applications in mind. This means that considerable effort has been made to optimise components and equipment in terms of weight, space and energy requirements. Depending on the particular conguration you have purchased, it is possible that functionality may be slightly reduced compared to a desktop PC if you are running processor-intensive gaming software, e.g. games with intensive 3D graphics. Updating your hardware with drivers which have not been approved by Fujitsu Technology Solutions may result in performance losses, data losses or malfunction of the equipment. A list of approved drivers and current BIOS versions can be downloaded from: "http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/Download/Index.asp"

Help if problems occur Should you encounter a problem with your computer that you cannot resolve yourself:

Note the ID number of your device. The ID number is found on the type rating plate on the back or underside of the casing. For further clarication of the problem, contact the Service Desk for your country (see the Service Desk list or visit the Internet at

"http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/contact/servicedesk/ServiceDeskNumber_Int.asp"). When you do this, please have ready the ID number and serial number of your system. 92 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The notebooks date or time is incorrect Bufferbattery,loadCause Time and date are incorrect. Troubleshooting With the BIOS-Setup-Utility, you can set the Summertime Time,daylightsavings Timenotcorrect Timenotcorrect Incorrectdate/time Dateisincorrect date and time in the main menu. If the time and date are still set incorrectly after switching on the notebook. Please contact your sales outlet or our Hotline/Service Desk. Battery indicator does not illuminate Fault elimination Cause The battery is not installed correctly. Switch the notebook off. Check whether the battery is installed correctly in its compartment. The battery is fully discharged. Switch the notebook on. Charge the battery. or Install a charged battery. or Connect the notebook to a mains outlet using the mains adapter. When certain characters are entered on the keyboard, only numerals are written Troubleshooting AbeepsoundseverysecondCause Press the Num key. The virtual numeric keypad of your device is activated, see "Virtual numeric keypad", Page 39 LCDscreen The notebooks LCD screen remains blank LCDscreenistoodarkCause Monitor is switched off. External monitor or television set connected. Troubleshooting Press a key or touch the touchpad. Press the key combination to switch the screen output, see "Key combinations", Page 40. Fujitsu 93 Troubleshooting and tips The LCD screen is difcult to read Troubleshooting LCDscreenCause Turn the notebook or alter the tilt of the LCD Reected glare LCDscreen screen. Increase the brightness of the screen. The external monitor remains blank Troubleshooting MonitorCause Switch the external monitor on. Monitor is switched off. Press any key to continue. Power saving has been activated (monitor is blank). Brightness is set to dark. Screen output is set to the notebooks LCD screen Adjust the brightness of the monitor. Press the key combination to switch the screen output, see "Key combinations", Page 40. The external monitors power cable or data cable is not connected properly. Switch off the external monitor and the notebook. Check whether the power cable is plugged properly into the external monitor and into the power socket. Check whether the data cable is properly connected to the notebook and the external monitor (if it is plugged in with a connector). Switch on the external monitor and the notebook. Screen The external monitor is blank or the image is unstable MonitorCause The wrong external monitor has been selected or the wrong screen resolution has been set for the application program. Troubleshooting Terminate the application program in Windows by pressing Alt + F4 . If the fault persists after closing the program, use the key combination for switching the screen output (see "Key combinations", Page 40) to switch over to the notebooks LCD screen. Change the following setting:

Set the screen resolution: Set the screen resolution as described in the documentation for your operating system. Select monitor: Select monitor 1 or 2 as described in the documentation for your operating system. 94 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The cursor does not correctly follow the pen movements Cause Pen incorrectly calibrated Fault elimination Calibrate the pen as shown under Hardware and Sound / Tablet PC Settings in the Control Panel, see "Setting the pen", Page 33 and

"Calibrating the pen", Page 34. Pen input not working Cause Incorrect driver installed. Troubleshooting If your device is one which can only be operated using the pen, install the driver for the standard model. or If your device is one which can be operated using the pen and by nger, install the driver for the "Dual Digitizer"

model. The notebook cannot be started NotebookCause The battery is not installed correctly. Troubleshooting Check whether the battery is installed correctly in its compartment. The battery is dead. Switch the notebook on. Charge the battery. or Insert a charged battery. or Connect the mains adapter to the notebook. The power adapter is not connected correctly. Check whether the mains adapter is connected correctly to the notebook. Switch the notebook on. Fujitsu 95 Troubleshooting and tips Notebook The notebook stops working EnergysavingmodeCause Notebook is in energy saving mode. An application programme has caused the malfunction. Troubleshooting Leave energy saving mode. Close the application program or restart the notebook (by restarting the operating system or switching the device off and back on again). The battery is dead. The printer does not print PrinterdoesnotprintCause The printer is not switched on. The printer is not connected correctly. The printer driver is faulty or not correctly installed, or it is the wrong printer driver. Charge the battery. or Insert a charged battery. or Connect the mains adapter to the notebook. Troubleshooting Make sure that the printer is switched on and ready for operation (refer to the documentation supplied with the printer). Check that the data cable connecting the notebook to the printer is properly connected. Check that the data cable connecting the notebook to the printer is properly connected. Check whether the correct printer driver is loaded (refer to the printer documentation). The radio connection to a network does not work TheradioconnectiontoanetworkdoesnotworkCause The wireless component is disabled. Troubleshooting Switch the radio component on (see

"Switching the wireless components on and off", Page 60). The wireless component is enabled. Despite this, the wireless connection to a network does not work. Check whether the radio connection is switched on via the software. Further information on using the radio component can be found in the help les. 96 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The battery discharges too quickly Troubleshooting Battery:Cause The battery is either too hot or too cold. In this Bring the notebook up/down to a normal case the battery indicator ashes. temperature again. You may have an application running that consumes a great deal of power due to frequent accessing of the hard disk or optical drive. The maximum brightness may have been set for the screen. If the operating time of the battery life is extremely short, the battery is probably too old. Replace battery if necessary. Use the mains adapter as frequently as possible. Set the screen slightly darker with the key combination for Decreasing the screen brightness in order to reduce the amount of power being drawn. Acousticerrormessages Acoustic warnings ErrorsCause A beep sounds every few seconds. The battery is almost at. Troubleshooting Charge the battery. Error messages on the screen Errormessage:This section describes the error messages generated by the BIOS Setup. Error messages displayed by the operating system or programmes are described in the relevant documentation. Errormessagesonthescreen If the error message appears repeatedly, despite troubleshooting measures, please contact the place of purchase or our customer service centre. Error message/cause CMOS battery bad If the error message occurs repeatedly, the buffer battery in the notebook is at. System CMOS checksum bad - default conguration used The system conguration information is incorrect. Resolution Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Switch the notebook off. Switch the notebook on. Press the function key F2 to access the BIOS Setup. In the BIOS Setup, select the Exit menu. Select the entry Load Setup Defaults. Select OK and press the Enter key. Fujitsu 97 Troubleshooting and tips Error message/cause Extended memory failed at offset: xxxx Failing Bits:

zzzz zzzz When testing the extended memory an error has resulted at the address xxxx. Failure Fixed Disk n The settings of the hard disk drive are incorrect. Keyboard controller error Keyboard error nn Stuck key Operating system not found Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP This error message appears if an error occurs during the self-test before starting the operating system. Previous boot incomplete - Default conguration used Due to an error during the previous system boot, default values were used for certain settings. Check the settings in the BIOS Setup. Real time clock error nnnnK Shadow RAM failed at offset: xxxx Failing Bits: zzzz System battery is dead - Replace and run SETUP System cache error - Cache disabled System timer error Resolution Check whether the additional memory module has been inserted correctly. Start the BIOS Setup (Primary Master submenu) and select the correct settings. Switch the notebook off with the ON/OFF switch. Wait 3 - 5 seconds and switch on the notebook again. If you are using an external keyboard:

Check the connection and reboot the notebook. Make sure that no key is pressed. Check in the BIOS Setup whether your hard disk has been set correctly. Make sure that the operating system is installed on the corresponding drive. Press the F1 function key to start the operating system. Press the function key F2 to access the BIOS Setup. Press the F1 function key when prompted to do so. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. 98 Fujitsu Technical data Notebook General Processor Main memory (SO DIMM) Electrical data Safety regulations complied with Protection class Maximum power draw (when the notebook is switched on and the battery is charged):

LCD screen Size Resolution Pixel class Brightness control Technology Digitizer and glass panel WebCam Graphics card Chip Maximum resolution on external display:

Dimensions Width x depth x height Weight depending on conguration Input devices Keyboard Touchpad Tablet buttons Pen Technical data 3rd Generation Intel Core with vPro technology Maximum 16 Gbyte DDR3 2 slots for 2 Gbyte, 4 Gbyte or 8 Gbyte modules CE II 80 W (with and without connected port replicator) 31.75 cm / 12.5" TFT HD 1366 x 768 (HD), 16 mio. colors II 12 levels Wide-View High-Bright WXGA Display with LED Background Lighting Matter Touchscreen Full-HD camera (1080 p), with status indicator Toughened glass Dual Digitizer Intel HD Graphics 4000 1920 x 1200 subpixels, 16 mio. colors on port replicator:

VGA: 1920 x 1200 subpixels DVI: 1920 x 1200 subpixels DisplayPort: 2560 x 1600 subpixels 315.6 mm x 233 mm x 37.5-33.5 mm with rubber feet from 1.8 kg 85 buttons, splash-protected 2 keys 5 buttons + 1 Windows button 1 freely programmable rocker button / eraser Fujitsu 99 Technical data Slots Memory card slot ExpressCard slot SIM card slot Ports Monitor port (analogue) HDMI port LAN port Microphone port/Line In Headphones port/Line Out Docking port USB (Universal Serial Bus) Security Lock Ambient conditions Environment class DIN IEC 721 Mechanism class DIN IEC 721 Operating temperature Transport temperature (2K2) Port Replicator (optional) Electrical data Safety regulations complied with Protection class Ports Monitor port (analogue) Monitor port (digital) DisplayPort LAN port USB (Universal Serial Bus) Audio Docking port Security Lock Ambient conditions Environment class DIN IEC 721 Mechanism class DIN IEC 721 Operating temperature Transport temperature 1 x SD Card 1 x ExpressCard/54 1 x 15-pin socket 1 x Socket, RJ45 3.5 mm stereo mini jack 3.5 mm stereo mini jack 100-pin socket Total: 3 x USB (1 x USB 3.0 with charging function (Anytime USB charge), 2 x USB 2.0) 1 x 7K1 7M2 5 .... 35 15C .... 60C CE II 15-pin 25-pin, DVI-D 1 x RJ45 4 x USB 3.0 Headphone port 100-pin 1 x 7K1 7M2 5 C .... 35 15 C .... 60 100 Fujitsu Technical data Rechargeable battery You will nd information on the batteries used in your device on the Internet at "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/". In addition to the main battery, you can order an optional battery which is inserted in the module slot. All rechargeable batteries are 6-cell batteries. Rated voltage Rated capacity Nominal power Main battery 10.8 V 72.4 Wh 6700 mAh Optional battery

(to be inserted in the module bay) 10.8 V 28.1 Wh 2600 mAh The operating time depends on the device conguration, the active applications and the energy-saving settings. Mains adapter for use with the notebook and port replicator The following technical data applies to the mains adapter supplied with the notebook and to the port replicator which you can order optionally. Primary Rated voltage Rated frequency Max. rated current Secondary Nominal power Rated voltage Max. rated current 100 V to 240 V (automatic) 50 Hz to 60 Hz (automatic) 0.7 A to 1.2 A 80 W 19 V 4.22 A An additional mains adapter or power cable can be ordered at any time. Fujitsu 101 Manufacturers notes Manufacturers notes Disposal and recycling NotesInformation about this subject can be found on your notebook or on our Internet pages. Declarations of Conformity DeclarationofconformityThe "Declarations of Conformity" for the device can be found on the Internet at:

"http://globalsp.ts.fujitsu.com/sites/certicates/default.aspx". Fujitsu Technology Solutions hereby declares that your device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. CE marking CEmarkingCE marking for devices with radio component This equipment complies with the requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and Commission from 9 March, 1999 governing Radio and Telecommunications Equipment and mutual recognition of conformity. This equipment can be used in the following countries:

Belgium Estonia UK Latvia Malta Poland Switzerland Czech Republic Bulgaria Finland Ireland Liechtenstein The Netherlands Portugal Slovakia Hungary Germany Greece Italy Luxembourg Austria Sweden Spain Denmark France Iceland Lithuania Norway Rumania Slovenia Cyprus Contact the corresponding government ofce in the respective country for current information on possible operating restrictions. If your country is not included in the list, then please contact the corresponding supervisory authority as to whether the use of this product is permitted in your country. Regulatory notices 102 Fujitsu Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. 103 - Regulatory Information Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:

On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. 104 This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. 105 Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 -

5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 106 -

Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing one of the following optional devices:

Integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n) Atheros XSPAN 802.11abgn Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 450 Mbps

(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, and IEEE802.11n CCX4.0. 107- Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode

"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 49. Ad Hoc Mode Network 108- Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*

Wireless LAN

*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 50. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 109 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). 110 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless Device On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. Wireless Device Switch Figure 51. Wireless Device On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 111- Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Configuring the Wireless LAN The optional WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:

Configuring the WLAN 1 Click the Start button, then select Control Panel. (If you are in Windows Vista and the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel.) 2 Double-click the Network and Sharing Center icon. 3 Select Manage wireless networks from the left panel. 4 Click on the [Add] button. 5 Depending upon what type of connection you would like to make, make a selection. For an infrastructure network, select Manually create a network profile. For ad hoc network, select Create an ad hoc network. 6 Enter the required information. If necessary, consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 7 In the event you require assistance, go to the Network and Sharing Center window (Start -> Control Panel ->

Network and Sharing Center), and type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connecting to a Network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:

1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:

112- Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] ->

Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP or WPA/WPA2 Pre-

Shared key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the [Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. 113 Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection

(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username/password, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 114- Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Specification Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**

Number of channels The integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2) and Atheros XSPAN 802.11a/b/g/n WLAN devices conform to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*.

(Automatic switching) 54 Mbps maximum data rate (IEEE802.11n to be determined) 802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n: 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used. 5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, CKIP, WPA 1.0 and WPA 2.0 compliant Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****

* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.

** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.

*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.

**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 115 WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The Integrated Bluetooth module is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks (PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. SLIDING THE WIRELESS DEVICE SWITCH ON THE FRONT OF THE SYSTEM WILL TURN BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES ON AND OFF AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE BLUETOOTH INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

CLICK ON THE BLUETOOTH ICON IN THE SYSTEM NOTIFICATION AREA LOCATED IN THE LOWER RIGHT CORNER OF THE SCREEN. SELECT TURN ADAPTER OFF. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth The Bluetooth module contains a robust Help users guide to assist you in learning about operation of the Bluetooth device. To access the Help file:

1 Click on the Bluetooth icon in notification area. 2 Select Open Settings. The "Bluetooth Settings" dialog will be opened. 3 Select the Share tab. 4 Click on "Learn more about Bluetooth sharing" link. The Bluetooth User Guide will open. For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at: www.bluetooth.com. 116 - Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 117 - Using the Bluetooth Device Index Index A A beep sounds every second 93 Acoustic error messages 97 Anti-theft protection 69 Audio devices, connecting 81 Audio ports 81 B Backspace 38 Bass loudspeaker (subwoofer) 58 Battery battery life 45 caring for and maintaining 45 charge level 45, 54 charging 45 self-discharge 45 storage 45 Battery status meter 45 Battery:

discharges too quickly 97 BIOS Setup Utility calling 90 exiting 91 operating 90 protecting with password 70 settings 90 Bluetooth Switching off module 60 Switching on module 60 Bluetooth, safety notes 12 Board 82 Buffer battery, load 93 Buttons 37 C Caps Lock 38 CD/DVD indicator 51 CD/DVD:

manual emergency removal 52 CE marking 102 Charging capacity, battery 45 Cleaning 14 Components installing / removing 82 Conguration, BIOS Setup Utility 90 Connecting audio devices 81 Connecting headphones 81 Crystal View display cleaning 14 Cursor control keys 38 Cursor keys 38 D Date is incorrect 93 Declaration of conformity 102 Device setting up 16 Devices connecting 75 disconnecting 75 Display orientation selecting 24 DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES 104 Drive Removing 49 E Emergency removal of data carrier 52 Energy energy saving 13 Energy saving 13 Energy saving mode leaving 96 Enter 38 Enter key 38 Error message:

on the screen 97 Error messages on the screen 97 Errors Acoustic warnings 97 ESD 82 Ethernet LAN 62 ExpressCard 56 F Fault correction 92 Fingerprint sensor 69 congure 69 15 First-time setup Fn + F10 41 Fn key 38 Fn+F3 40 Fn+F4 40 Fn+F6 40 Fn+F7 40 Fn+F8 40 Fn+F9 40 118 Fujitsu Index removing 84 Memory module important notes 83 installing 85 removing 84 Microphone 58 Microphone, connecting 81 Mobile operation 13 Module Removing 49 Module bay 49 Modules 49 Monitor connecting 76 drifting display 94 remains blank 94 Monitor port see VGA connection socket 76 N Notebook before you travel 13 cannot be started 95 cleaning 14 stops working 96 switching off 26 transporting 1314 using 18 Notebook, operation 18 Notebook: switching on 21 Notes 12 boards 82 cleaning 14 disposal / recycling 102 energy saving 13 LCD screen 28 Safety 12 transport 13 Num Lock indicator 39 Numeric keypad 37 see Virtual numeric keypad 39 O Operating system activating system protection 71 cancel system protection 71 protecting with password 71 Optical drive 50 P Packaging 15 G Getting started 15 H Handling data carriers 50 Hardware conguration 90 HDMI port 78 I Important notes 12 Incorrect date/time 93 Inserting a data carrier 51 K Keyboard 37 cleaning 14 L Landscape orientation screen 24 LCD screen cleaning 14 difcult to read 94 notes 28 reduce brightness 40 reected glare 94 remains blank 93 LCD screen is too dark 93 Life, battery 45 Line feed 38 Loudspeaker switch off 40 switch on 40 Loudspeakers 58 see Adding memory 83 M Main memory Mains adapter connecting 16 setting up 16 Manual removal of data carrier 52 Mechanical backup 69 Memory card handling 55 inserting 55 removing 56 Memory expansion installing 85 Fujitsu 119 Index Password changing 71 entering 70 removing 71 Password protection 70 Password protection:

hard disk 72 Peripheral devices connecting 75 disconnecting 75 Port Replicator Ports 63 Portrait orientation screen 24 Port Replicator 63 Ports Power power consumption 54 power-management features 54 Power-on indicator 21 Preparing for operation 16 Printer does not print 96 R Radio component:

safety notes 12 Rechargeable battery 45 see Battery 45 Regulatory information notebooks with radio device 106 Notebooks without radio device 103 Removing a data carrier 51 Removing memory see Adding memory 83 Return 38 no screen display 94 S Safety notes 12 Screen Screen brightness increase 40 reduce 40 Screen port Security functions 68 Security Lock 69 Selecting a location 16 Self-discharge, battery 45 Servicing 82 Setup see VGA connection socket 76 see BIOS Setup Utility 90 Shift 38 Shift key 38 Shift+Tab 41 Slot ExpressCard 56 Memory cards 55 Start key 38 Status indicators 18 Summer time 93 Supervisor password changing 71 entering 70 removing 71 Suspend/Resume button 21 Switching on for the rst time 17 Symbols indicators 18 System conguration 90 System expansion 83 see Adding memory 83 System settings, BIOS Setup Utility 90 T Tab back 41 Tab key 38 The radio connection to a network does not work 96 Time not correct 93 Time, daylight savings 93 Tips 92 Toggle output screen 41 Touchpad 35, 40 buttons 35 cleaning 14 dragging items 36 executing commands 35 moving the pointer 35 selecting an item 35 switch off 40 Touchpad buttons 40 TPM 74 Transport Transport damage 15 Transportation 1314 Travel, notebook 13 Troubleshooting 92 Trusted Platform Module 74 U UMTS 61 Antenna 61 120 Fujitsu USB charging function 80 USB ports 79 User password changing 71 entering 70 removing 71 Using the Kensington Lock Cable 69 V VGA connection socket 76 Virtual numeric keypad 39 Volume decrease 40 Index increase 40 Volume control 58 W Webcam 44 Weight Saver Removing 49 Wireless LAN Switching off module 60 Switching on module 60 Wireless LAN:

safety notes 12 Fujitsu 121

www.qualcomm.com J QUALCOMM Incorporated 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121-1714 September 16, 2013 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Authorization of Handling FCC Regulatory Applications FCC Identifier PPD To Whom It May Concern:

I, hereby, authorize Stanley Lin, to handle FCC Regulatory related applications for QUALCOMM ATHEROS Incorporated FCC Identifier PPD and can sign all required application documents. Best Regards, Paul Guckian VP, Engineering Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121 Office: 858-651-1547 pguckian@qualcomm.com

Keualcomm ATHEROS Date:2016/4/12 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential document from public disclosure indefinitely. Software Security Statement Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards Sauly le Stanley Lin, Global Product Compliance

Date: 4/7/2016 To whom it may concern:

Request for Class II Permissive Change FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 (grant date 09/24/2010) Pursuant to CFR 2.1043, Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. hereby requests a Class II Permissive Change. Updating 5 GHz Band 1 ~ Band 4 to FCC "New Rules" from "Old Rules". The maximum conducted output power (average) remains the same for operation The maximum conducted output power (average) remains the same for operation The maximum conducted output power (average) was reduced for operation in in UNII-1. in UNII-2a and 2c. UNII-3. There is no change in hardware or in existing RF relevant portion. Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin / Global Product Compliance

Power of Attorney 2016/4/7 To whom it may concern:

We, the undersigned Qualcomm Atheros, Inc. hereby authorize Sporton International Inc. of Taiwan to act on our behalf in all matters relating to all processes required in the FCC Part 15 approval and any communication needed with the national authority. Any and all acts carried out by BVCPS on our behalf shall have the same effects as acts of our own. This authorization is limited to the following products FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 If you have any questions regarding the authorization, please dont hesitate to contact us. Thank you!

Sincerely yours, Stanley Lin / Global Product Compliance QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 T 408.773.5200 | F 408-773-9940 qca.qualcomm.com

www.qualcomm.com J QUALCOMM Incorporated 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121-1714 June 15, 2011 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Authorization of Handling FCC Regulatory Applications To Whom It May Concern:

I, hereby, authorize Mr. Michael Green, to handle FCC Regulatory related applications for QUALCOMM ATHEROS Incorporated and sign all required application documents. Best Regards, Paul Guckian VP, Engineering QUALCOMM Incorporated 5775 Morehouse Drive San Diego, CA 92121 Office: 858-651-1547 pguckian@qualcomm.com

(Original Grant date: 09/24/2010) Applicant: Atheros Communications Inc. Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 originally granted on 09/24/2010. The change filed under this application is:

New Fujitsu Host PC embedded with this approved module If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications Inc. Atheros Communications, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com

To:

EMC Technologies Pty Ltd ABN 82 057 105 549 176 Harrick Road, Keilor Park Victoria Australia 3042 Ph: + 613 9365 1000 Fax: + 613 9331 7455 email: melb@emctech.com.au Federal Communications Commission and Industry Canada 1 Date:

M120827 Chieu Huynh No. of pages:

Certification Manager 13th September 2012 FCC&IC C2PC FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 (IC: 4104A-AR5BHB116). Attention:

From:

EMC Ref:

Subject:

Please receive FCC/IC C2PC applications for review. The Atheros AR5BHB116 WLAN module was originally certified by Atheros as a modular approval under FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 and Canada ID: 4104A-AR5BHB116. The intention of this application is to submit for a Class II permissive change for the AR5BHB116 Atheros WLAN module (802.11a/b/g/n 2x2), installed in Fujitsu STYLISTIC T Series, Model: T732 /

TH702. The Radio modules are installed in a controlled environment at the Fujitsu notebook production/assembly factory. The other transmitter that may be installed in the Fujitsu STYLISTIC T Series, Model: T732 / TH702 is Broadcom Bluetooth Module, Model: BCM92070MD_REF6. The Bluetooth module was originally certified by Broadcom as a modular approval under FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1043 and Canada ID: 4324A-

BRCM1043. This Bluetooth pre-approved module, is not co-located as the WLAN and Bluetooth antennas are >5cms apart. The maximum power output of the Bluetooth module is 4dBm (2.5mW). RF exposure and labelling will be addressed by Fujitsu according to FCC/IC multi-transmitter and modular procedures. The antenna type (PIFA) used for original module approval is same as the one used in this host. There are two variants of the Fujitsu STYLISTIC T Series, Model: T732 / TH702 covered in this report. One that is equipped with the modular certified low power Bluetooth transmitter with built-in antenna and one variant that does not contain Bluetooth transmitter or Bluetooth antenna. SAR testing was conducted on the sample that is equipped with the Bluetooth transmitter and Bluetooth antenna. This C2PC certification is for the T732 / TH702 model PC with Atheros AR5BHB116 WLAN module. EMC Technologies Pty Ltd is acting as agent for Qualcomm Atheros during this product approval. Please add the below grant note to the IC Certificate. GRANT NOTE: AR5BHB116 WLAN in Fujitsu T732 / TH702 STYLISTIC PC Regards _____________ Chieu Huynh Senior EMC Engineer EMC Technologies Pty Ltd EMC Technologies Pty Ltd, 176 Harrick VIC 3043 Australia Ph: +613 9365 1000 Fax: +613 9331 7455 www.emctech.com.au

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY According to FCC Part15 Responsible Party Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Hereby declares that the product Product name:

Model Number:

Test Report Number:

Conforms the following specifications:

Notebook PC 1732, TH702 FG12-124EAL Fujitsu America Inc. 1250 East Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746 - 6000 FCC Par15, Subpart B, Class B Digital Device Supplementary Information:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Date: September 13, 2012

Signature:

Test Laboratory:

Fujitsu General EMC Laboratory Ltd NVLAP Lab Code:200373-0 1116 Suenaga, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki 213-8502, Japan Ph: +81-44-861-7897 Fax: +81-44-861-9890

July 9, 2012 Ref: Authority to Act as an agent for submission of Qualcomm Atheros WLAN module FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 and IC : 4104A-AR5BHB116 AUTHORITY TO ACT AS AGENT & FORM 731 SIGNATORY I appoint EMC Technologies Pty Ltd to act as agent, on our behalf in this application for equipment authorization. In addition, I authorize Mr. Chris Zombolas, Technical Director of EMC Technologies Pty Ltd to sign the Form 731 and Mr. Chieu Huynh (Senior EMC Test Engineer) to be listed as the technical and non-technical contact for this application. Antennas installed in this host are already approved with this module. Our customer Fujitsu Limited, Japan, manufacturer of the host PC, confirm that the module installed in the host PC is identical to the originally certified module. Sincerely,

Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 T 408.773.5200 | F 408-773-9940 qca.qualcomm.com

Federal Communications Commission - Authorization and Evaluation Division Industry Canada Certification and Engineering Bureau Aug 22nd, 2012 Ref: Confidentiality Request regarding application for certification of FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 and IC: 4104A-AR5BHB116 Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

User Manual Photos As the above information contains proprietary information which would be benefit to our competitors, we request that these exhibits be held from public view for 180 days from the issue date of the grant of approval. In addition, pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Antenna Details The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to Section 0.457 of the Rules, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely,

Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance QUALCOMM ATHEROS, INC. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 T 408.773.5200 | F 408-773-9940 qca.qualcomm.com

To:

EMC Technologies Pty Ltd ABN 82 057 105 549 176 Harrick Road, Keilor Park Victoria Australia 3042 Ph: + 613 9365 1000 Fax: + 613 9331 7455 email: melb@emctech.com.au Federal Communications Commission and Industry Canada 1 Date:

M120610 Chieu Huynh No. of pages:

20th August 2012 Certification Manager FCC&IC C2PC FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 (IC: 4104A-AR5BHB116). Attention:

From:

EMC Ref:

Subject:

Please receive FCC/IC C2PC applications for review. Model: AR5BHB116 Notes: Atheros AR5BHB116 in Fujitsu STYLISTIC Q Series, Model: Q702 The Atheros AR5BHB116 WLAN module was originally certified by Atheros as a modular approval under FCC ID: PPD-AR5BHB116 and Canada ID: 4104A-AR5BHB116. The intention of this application is to submit for a Class II permissive change for the AR5BHB116 Atheros WLAN module (802.11a/b/g/n 2x2), installed in Fujitsu STYLISTIC Q Series, Model: Q702. The Radio modules are installed in a controlled environment at the Fujitsu notebook production/assembly factory. The other transmitter that may be installed in the Fujitsu STYLISTIC Q Series, Model: Q702 is Broadcom Bluetooth Module, Model: BCM92070MD_REF6. The Bluetooth module was originally certified by Broadcom as a modular approval under FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1043 and Canada ID:

4324A-BRCM1043. This Bluetooth pre-approved module, is not co-located as the WLAN and Bluetooth antennas are >5cms apart. The maximum power output of the Bluetooth module is 4dBm

(2.5mW). RF exposure and labelling will be addressed by Fujitsu according to FCC/IC multi-transmitter and modular procedures. The antenna type (PIFA) used for original module approval is same as the one used in this host. There are two variants of the Fujitsu STYLISTIC Q Series, Model: Q702 covered in this report. One that is equipped with the modular certified low power Bluetooth transmitter with built-in antenna and one variant that does not contain Bluetooth transmitter or Bluetooth antenna. SAR testing was conducted on the sample that is equipped with the Bluetooth transmitter and Bluetooth antenna. This certification is for the Q702 model PC with Atheros AR5BHB116 WLAN module. EMC Technologies Pty Ltd is acting as agent for Qualcomm Atheros during this product approval. Regards _____________ Chieu Huynh Senior EMC Engineer EMC Technologies Pty Ltd EMC Technologies Pty Ltd, 176 Harrick VIC 3043 Australia Ph: +613 9365 1000 Fax: +613 9331 7455 www.emctech.com.au

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY According to FCC Part15 Responsible Party Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Hereby declares that the product Product name:

Model Number:

Test Report Number:

Fujitsu America Inc. 1250 East Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746 - 6000 Notebook PC Q702 FG12-096EAL Conforms the following specifications:

FCC Par15, Subpart B, Class B Digital Device Supplementary Information:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Date:

Signature:

August 10, 2012 ii Test Laboratory:

Fujitsu General EMC Laboratory Lid NVLAP Lab Code:200373-0 1116 Suenaga, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki 213-8502, Japan Ph: +81-44861-7897 Fax: +81-44-861-9890

Regulatory Wireless Antenna Information

(English Language Required for Intel Regulatory Review / Approval)

(OEM/ODM or antenna vendor is required to complete this document with platform antenna information. Remove Intel references and make this your own document) Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Platform Platform Platform Platform Platform Owner Brand Name Model Name ODM Target Launch Date Antenna Antenna Antenna Antenna Manufacturer Part Number Module Module ModuleModule With WLAN Module

(Check Box) ChiefRiver Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tercel

(2012/ 07/B ) NISSEI ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. Tx1 Antenna: CP583689-01 Tx/ Rx2 Antenna: CP583689-01 Tx/ Rx3 Antenna:

112BNHMW 112BNMMW 622ANHMW 633ANHMW 622ANXHMW 612BNXHMW (Kelsey Peak) 62205ANHMW (Taylor Peak) 11230BNHMW (Rainbow Peak 1) 62230ANHMW (Rainbow Peak 2) 100BNHMW (Crane Peak 1) 130BNHMW (Crane Peak 2) 2200BNHMW (Marble Peak) 2230BNHMW (Jackson Peak 1) 6235ANHMW (Jackson Peak 2) 105BNHMW (Canyon Peak) 135BNHMW (Canyon Peak + BT) Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 1/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Antenna Sample / Antenna Data Requirements for worldwide regulatory approval n o i t c e S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description of Required OEM / ODM Antenna Information 1A Part Number for Antenna only 1B Antenna Manufacturer Name 1C Description of Antenna Type US / IC EU Japan Taiwan S.Korea Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Part number of Antenna Assembly / cable impedance, length & diameter. 1D 1E Tx1, Tx2 & Tx3 antenna (Peak Gain W/ cable loss) *

1F Tx1, Tx2 & Tx3 antenna (Peak Gain only) *

1G VSWR of cable including connector 1H Tx1, Tx2 & Tx3 antenna (Cable loss W/ connector) *

1E OR 1F, 1G, 1H Required Desired Desired Desired Desired Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Required Dimensioned Photographs and Drawings of Tx1, Tx2, and Tx3 (or Rx3) antennas Radiation patterns of antennas loaded in the host platform. Platform model name / number - correlated to antenna manufacturer and antenna part number Photograph(s) or Drawings showing location of antennas in platform. (S. Korea requires photographs of antennas for approval submission). Taiwan requires pictures of each antenna type shown in the system. Mech. drawings / photos with dimensions of antenna locations and distance from end-user (For evaluation of SAR testing requirement). Photograph(s) or Drawings showing the location of all antennas (WLAN, other) and distance between those transmitting antennas. Information will be used to evaluate whether co-location testing is required. Required Required Required Required Required Required Desired Required Required Required Required Required Desired Required Desired Required Required Desired Required

(Photos) Required

(Photos) Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Local representative contact information for LMA/

PARS process. Required N/A N/A N/A N/A Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 2/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Antenna Information Section 1. Antenna Assembly Specifications

(P/N:CP583689-01) Tx1/ Rx1 Antenna

[Cable color

:Gray]

NISSEI ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. Information PIFA

(P/N:

CP583689-01) 50 ohm Coaxial length: 32.5cm diameter: 1.09mm 1A Antenna Part Number 1B Manufacture 1C Antenna Type 1D 1E 1F Cable Assembly Part Number and

*Peak Gain W/

Cable loss (dBi) Peak Gain w/o Cable Loss (dBi) 1G VSWR 1H Cable Loss (dBi)

(P/N:CP583689-01) Tx2/ Rx2 Antenna

[Cable color

:Black]

NISSEI ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. PIFA

(P/N:

CP583689-01) 50 ohm Coaxial length: 56.5cm diameter: 1.09mm 2300-2400MHz

-2.85dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz __.__ max 2300-2400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz

-2.00dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz __.__ max 2400-2500MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz

-0.76dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz __.__ max 2500-2700MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz __.__ max 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz __.__ max 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz __.__ max 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz

-0.26dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz __.__ max 5150-5350MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz 0.95dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz __.__ max 5470-5725MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz 0.88dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz __.__ max 5725-5850MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz

-0.07dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz __.__ max 2300-2400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz 0.63dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz __.__ max 2400-2500MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz 0.45dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz __.__ max 2500-2700MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz __.__ max 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz __.__ max 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz __.__ max 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz 1.81dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz __.__ max 5150-5350MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz 1.41dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz __.__ max 5470-5725MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz 0.84dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz __.__ max 5725-5850MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2300-2400MHz __.__ max 2300-2400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2400-2500MHz __.__ max 2400-2500MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 2500-2700MHz __.__ max 2500-2700MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3200-3400MHz __.__ max 3200-3400MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3400-3600MHz __.__ max 3400-3600MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 3600-3800MHz __.__ max 3600-3800MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5150-5350MHz __.__ max 5150-5350MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5470-5725MHz __.__ max 5470-5725MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz _.__ dBi (peak) 5725-5850MHz __.__ max 5725-5850MHz _.__ dBi (peak)

Antenna Peak Gain required being test in system basis.

1E frame contend absolutely peak antenna gain include H/V Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 3/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Antenna Peak Gain Table:

Tx1 antenna Tx2 (or Rx2) Antenna Tx3 (or Rx3) Antenna Frequency (MHz) Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal

(dBi) Vertical

(dBi)

(dBi)

-2.85

-3.01

-2.37

-2.00

-1.53

-0.77

-0.76

-0.44

-0.89

-0.26 0.35 0.95 0.88 0.00

-0.02

(dBi)

-6.11

-4.53

-3.40

-3.60

-3.87

-3.43

-4.10

-3.29

-2.28

-1.74

-0.63

-0.88

-1.22

-1.50

-1.43

(dBi)

-0.69

-0.07 0.37 0.63 0.45

-0.12

-0.57 0.25 1.01 0.65 1.09 0.55 0.73 0.19 0.10

(dBi)

-2.02

-1.74

-1.27

-1.33

-0.41

-3.00

-2.33 0.96 1.46 1.81 1.34 1.41 0.84 0.55 0.10 2300 2350 2400 2450 2500 2600 2700 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 5150 5250 5350 5470 5600 5725 5785 5850 Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 4/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Section 2. Dimensioned Photos or Drawings of Antennas Include a dimensioned photo and dimensioned drawing of Tx1 antenna here. 705 +/-30 mm 5.3 17.0 Tx1 Antenna Dimensioned Drawing:

Tx1 Antenna Photo:

7 1 2

. Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 5/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Include a dimensioned photo and dimensioned drawing of Tx2 (or Rx2) antenna here. Tx2 (or Rx2) Antenna Dimensioned Drawing:

520 +/-30 mm 5.3 17.0

. 7 1 2 Tx2 (or Rx2) Antenna Photo:

Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 6/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Include front view photo of all 3 antennas here. Antenna Manufacturer: NISSEI ELECTRIC CO.,LTD. Antenna Part Number: CP583689 (Tx1/Rx1,Tx2 or Rx2) Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 7/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Section 3. Radiation characteristics of antennae Loaded in Host Platform Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 8/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Section 4. Host Platform Information OEM / ODM Host platform: (XXXXXXX) platform correlated to antenna data Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 9/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Tx2 Tx1 24.5cm 24.5cm Bottom of laptop Bottom of laptop WWAN Aux WWAN Main Section 5. Antenna Host Platform Location Information Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing of Tx1, Tx2 and Tx3 antenna placements (measurements are not required for receive-only antenna). Any antenna that transmits must show dimensions to bottom of laptop. Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 10/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Section 6. Antenna dimensional information for SAR evaluation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between the transmit antennas and the user (excluding hands, wrist, feet, and ankle) 260 mm 245 mm 240 mm Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 11/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Section 7. Diagram Example of Co-Location Antenna Separation Include a dimensioned photo or dimensioned drawing showing the distance (mm) between all WLAN transmit antennas and other co-located radiator transmit antenna such as Bluetooth, WWAN,..

(Note: Due to the evolving rules regarding co-location, each platform will need to be reviewed on a case by case basis) 211mm 110mm 84mm WWAN Main Tx2/Rx2 WWAN AUX Tx1/Tx2 Bluetooth Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 12/13 Doc.No.:3.8.05 Rev 7.1 Sep 3, 2010 Section 8. Local representative contact information Local representative contact information is required for regulatory support for target countries below. Local company name Contact name FAX Number e-Mail Address Notes Phone number Argentina Azerbaijan Cambodia Canada Croatia Indonesia Israel Malaysia Moldova Philippines Singapore South Africa Taiwan USA Vietnam Telecommunication Equipment Dealer License Required Regulatory WLAN Antenna Information 13/13

January 8, 2008 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 47173 Benicia Street Fremont, CA 94538, USA To whom it may concern:

I, the undersigned, hereby authorize Ms. Claire Hoque/Application Examiner of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Ms. Claire Hoque of CCS on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. I, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;

b) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

c) make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;

d) do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

Atheros Communications, Inc. 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com e) upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

f) use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;

g) endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;

h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;

i) keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;

j) take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely, Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications Inc. Atheros Communications, Inc. 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com

Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 February 17, 2011 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: Confidentiality Request regarding application for certification of FCC ID: PPD-

AR5BHB116. Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Antenna Details The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. In addition, Pursuant to FCC DA 04-1705, this application includes a request for short term confidentiality for the following exhibits:

Internal photos Location Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual External Photos Sincerely, Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications Inc. Atheros Communications, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com

ATHEROS COMMUNICATIONS, INC., //PPD-AR5BHB116 //AN11T0383 2 messages Tim Dwyer <rfspectrum@gmail.com>

Tue, Jun 7, 2011 at 11:28 PM tim.dwyer@ccsemc.com <tim.dwyer@ccsemc.com>

To: Thu.Chan@ccsemc.com, Praveen.Rao@au.fujitsu.com Cc: tim.dwyer@ccsemc.com Hi Praveen, Review of the application is complete. Please provide a document that addresses the following issues:

1) Submit a channel/frequency plan for this device showing the channels that have active scanning or passive scanning. Active scanning is where the device can transmit a probe (beacon) and passive scanning is where the device is can listen only with no probes. 2) Verify that this device does not have ad-hoc mode 3) Verify that this application contains a complete User's Manual and/or Professional Installers Manual. If the manual is not complete, upload an updated User's Manual exhibit. 4) Can this device act as an access point on the non-DFS legacy frequencies (5.15-5.25 MHz) 5) Verify that this device meets the frequency requirements of Section 15.202 Praveen: Yes 6) For client devices that have software configuration control to operate in different modes (active scanning in some and passive scanning in others) in different bands (devices with multiple equipment classes or those that operate on non-DFS frequencies) or modular devices which configure the modes of operations through software, the application must provide software and operations description on how the software and / or hardware is implemented to ensure that proper operations modes can not be modified by end user or an installer. The items indicated above must be submitted before processing can continue on the above referenced application. Failure to provide the requested information within 30 days of the original e-mail date may result in application dismissal and forfeiture of the filing fee. Also, please note that partial responses increase processing time and should not be submitted. Any questions about the content of this correspondence should be directed to the e-mail address listed below the name of the sender. Revised documentation should not be emailed, but instead should be submitted through "Add Attachment" function at the UL-CCS website. Please have your Assessment Number and FCC ID/IC Certification number handy. You may use the following link: https://cert.ccsemc.com/filing/

Rao, Praveen <Praveen.Rao@au.fujitsu.com>

To: tim.dwyer@ccsemc.com, Thu.Chan@ccsemc.com Tue, Jun 7, 2011 at 11:48 PM Best regards, Tim Dwyer Technical Reviewer Hi Tim, Cheers, Praveen Hi Praveen, See my response below embedded in your email.

-----Original Message-----

From: tim.dwyer@CCSEMC.com [mailto:tim.dwyer@CCSEMC.com]

Sent: Wednesday, 8 June 2011 1:29 PM To: Thu.Chan@CCSEMC.com; Rao, Praveen Cc: tim.dwyer@CCSEMC.com Subject: ATHEROS COMMUNICATIONS, INC., //PPD-AR5BHB116 //AN11T0383 Review of the application is complete. Please provide a document that addresses the following issues:

1) Submit a channel/frequency plan for this device showing the channels that have active scanning or passive scanning. Active scanning is where the device can transmit a probe (beacon) and passive scanning is where the device is can listen only with no probes. Praveen : Letter attached 2) Verify that this device does not have ad-hoc mode Praveen: Ad-hoc mode is always disabled for the passive channels(also stated in the attached letter) 3) Verify that this application contains a complete User's Manual and/or Professional Installers Manual. If the manual is not complete, upload an updated User's Manual exhibit. Praveen: User Manual is same that was submitted in my email to a similar response like this. Let me know if I need to resend as it is a big file. 4) Can this device act as an access point on the non-DFS legacy frequencies (5.15-5.25 MHz) Praveen: No 5) Verify that this device meets the frequency requirements of Section 15.202 Praveen: Yes 6) For client devices that have software configuration control to operate in different modes (active scanning in some and passive scanning in others) in different bands (devices with multiple equipment classes or those that operate on non-DFS frequencies) or modular devices which configure the modes of operations through software, the application must provide software and operations description on how the software and / or hardware is implemented to ensure that proper operations modes can not be modified by end user or an installer. Praveen: User cannot modify any software or hardware

[Quoted text hidden]

Atheros HB116 Ad-Hoc letter.pdf 25K

January 8, 2008 Compliance Certification Services Certification Division 47173 Benicia Street Fremont, CA 94538, USA To whom it may concern:

I, the undersigned, hereby authorize Ms. Claire Hoque/Application Examiner of Compliance Engineering Services, Inc., d.b.a. Compliance Certification Services and hereafter referred to as CCS, to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Ms. Claire Hoque of CCS on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. I, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). In authorizing CCS as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;

b) make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

c) make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been granted;

d) do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

Atheros Communications, Inc. 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com e) upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

f) use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified standards;

g) endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;

h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;

i) keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;

j) take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) document the actions taken. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely, Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications Inc. Atheros Communications, Inc. 5480 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com

2011/4/11 Federal Communications Commission Equipment Authorization branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Re: Technical Justification Letter Pertaining to FCC ID : PPD-AR5BHB116 Gentlemen:

Sincerely, This is to justify that our client, Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. will be installing the identical approved AR5BHB116 2x2 802.11n PCIe Module, Model Name:

AR5BHB116 in a different portable host. We have done a SAR evaluation for this new portable host and are submitting for a Class II Permissive Change filing. There is no change on the module hardware and the antennas used in this portable host is the same antenna type as the previous with less gain by comparing to the certified antennas included in the original modular approval, and output power remains unchanged. Therefore EMC tests are not performed.

Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications, Inc. Atheros Communications, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com

2011/4/11 Federal Communications Commission Equipment Authorization branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Re: Technical Justification Letter Pertaining to FCC ID : PPD-AR5BHB116 Gentlemen:

Sincerely, This is to justify that our client, Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. will be installing the identical approved AR5BHB116 2x2 802.11n PCIe Module, Model Name:

AR5BHB116 in a different portable host. We have done a SAR evaluation for this new portable host and are submitting for a Class II Permissive Change filing. There is no change on the module hardware and the antennas used in this portable host is the same antenna type as the previous with less gain by comparing to the certified antennas included in the original modular approval, and output power remains unchanged. Therefore EMC tests are not performed.

Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications, Inc. Atheros Communications, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com

Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 February 17, 2011 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: Confidentiality Request regarding application for certification of FCC ID: PPD-

AR5BHB116. Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:

Antenna Details and Atheros Regulatory Algorithms and Practices. The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. In addition, Pursuant to FCC DA 04-1705, this application includes a request for short term confidentiality for the following exhibits for a maximum of 180 days:

Internal photos Location Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual External Photos Sincerely, Michael Green / Manager, Global Product Compliance Atheros Communications Inc. Atheros Communications, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive, San Jose, CA 95110 t 408 773 5200 f 408-773-9940 www.atheros.com

Lucy Tsai From:

Sent:

To:

Cc:

Subject:

Amy Lie Monday, April 25, 2011 11:35 AM Lucy Tsai Thu Chan; Sunny Shih; Claire Hoque RE: ATHEROS COMMUNICATIONS, INC., //PPD-AR5BHB116 //AN11T0223 Hi Lucy, Please refer to below for the answer. It is addressed by Atheros Michael Green for Samsung application. Thanks&bestregards, AmyLie AccountExecutive ULCCS 47173BeniciaStreet, Fremont,CA94538 Direct:5107711126 Cell:5104493874 Tel:5107711000 Email:amy.lie@ccsemc.com www.ccsemc.com From: Lucy Tsai Sent: Wednesday, April 13, 2011 8:17 AM To: Thu Chan; Claire Hoque Cc: Lucy Tsai Subject: ATHEROS COMMUNICATIONS, INC., //PPD-AR5BHB116 //AN11T0223 Hi,Thu, Pleaseaddressfollowingissues. Q#1:PleaseverifythatthisapplicationcontainsacompleteUsersManualand/orProfessionalInstallers Manual.Ifthemanualisnotcomplete,uploadanupdatedUsersManualexhibit. User manual submitted is complete. Q#2:Pleaseverifythatthisdevicedoesnothaveadhocmode This Atheros client device does support ad hoc (ie 802.11 IBSS mode) as well as other peer-to-

peer, non-infrastructure mode: WiFi WFA Direct. Q#3:Pleasesubmitachannel/frequencyplanforthisdeviceshowingthechannelsthathaveactivescanningor passivescanning.Activescanningiswherethedevicecantransmitaprobe(beacon)andpassivescanningis wherethedeviceiscanlistenonlywithnoprobes. This Atheros client device supports operation using all 802.11 channels for both 20 MHz and 40 MHz channel bandwidths (ie 802.11abg & HT20 & HT40 channels). The client supports operation in 2.4 GHz channels 1-14 and U-NII 1, U-NII 2, U-NII Worldwide and U-NII 3 bands (ie 5.15-5.35, 5.47-5.725 & 5.725-5.850 GHz) using standard 802.11 channel center frequencies. Active vs. passive scanning behavior changes dynamically depending on configuration and current operating state of the device. Compliance with FCC rules for Master/Client and passive scanning in 2.4 GHz channels 12-14 and radar channels is achieved via algorithms implemented in software as described in the attached document. Q#4:CanthisdeviceactasanaccesspointonthenonDFSlegacyfrequencies(5.155.25MHz) 1 This device can support WiFi direct mode wherein it acts like an access point using non-DFS frequencies. Q#5:PleaseverifythatthisdevicemeetsthefrequencyrequirementsofSection15.202 This device meets the frequency requirements of Section 15.202. It is achieved via algorithms implemented in software as described in the attached document. Q#6:Forclientdevicesthathavesoftwareconfigurationcontroltooperateindifferentmodes(activescanning insomeandpassivescanninginothers)indifferentbands(deviceswithmultipleequipmentclassesorthose thatoperateonnonDFSfrequencies)ormodulardeviceswhichconfigurethemodesofoperationsthrough software,theapplicationmustprovidesoftwareandoperationsdescriptiononhowthesoftwareand/or hardwareisimplementedtoensurethatproperoperationsmodescanotbemodifiedbyenduseroran installer. The attached document describes how the client software and hardware is implemented to ensure operation cannot be modified by the end user or installer. BestRegards, LucyTsai/ULCCS 2